JP6841300B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball wins a prize at a starting port and displays a variable effect or a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. ..

In such pachinko machines and the like , a gaming machine has been proposed in which continuous notice display is performed over a plurality of fluctuations to notify in advance that a specific effect such as a reach variation effect will be performed in the subsequent variation effect. There is.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-279560

In this type of pachinko machine and the like, there has been a demand for a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention stores an acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a determination information storage in which the first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. Based on the means, the determination means for determining the first information stored in the determination information storage means, and the first information stored in the determination information storage means before being determined by the determination means. The pre-determination means capable of executing the pre-determination, the pre-information storage means for storing the pre-determination result indicating the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means each time the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the determination result by the determination means are shown. A plurality of display means for displaying the identification information for the purpose, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes of the determination game for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. A dynamic display mode storage means in which the dynamic display mode of the above is stored, and a dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode from the dynamic display mode storage means based on the determination result. The specific display number determination means capable of determining the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means based on the prior information stored in the prior information storage means, and the specific display. It has a specific discriminating means for executing determination of whether or not to display an aspect based on the prior information, and the specific display number determination means is determined to display the specific display mode by the specific discriminating means. In this case, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means is determined less than the number of times the acquisition condition corresponding to the prior information stored in the prior information storage means is satisfied, and the specific display mode is determined. The display mode is configured so that the number of times of continuous display can be identified, and when the number of times is determined by the specific display number of times determination means, each of the above-mentioned items stored in the determination information storage means. all SANYO displayed once each over two said dynamic display mode continuous are displayed corresponding to the first information, the gaming machine, whereby said specific display mode is displayed When the identification information displayed up to is hidden, the alternative mode corresponding to the identification information is displayed at a position visible to the player in a smaller mode than the display identification information. Is made possible .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, an acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a determination information storage means for storing the first information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination thereof. A determination means for determining the first information stored in the information storage means and a preliminary determination based on the first information stored in the determination information storage means are executed before the determination is made by the determination means. Preliminary determination means that can be used, prior information storage means that stores prior information indicating the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means each time the acquisition condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. A plurality of dynamic display modes as a dynamic display mode of a display means to be displayed, a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a determination game for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. It has a dynamic display mode storage means in which is stored, and a dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode from the dynamic display mode storage means based on the determination result. Based on the prior information stored in the pre-article information storage means, a specific display number determination means capable of determining the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means and whether to display the specific display mode. When it is determined by the specific determination means that the specific display mode is to be displayed, the specific display number determination means has a specific determination means for executing the determination based on the prior information. The number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means is determined less than the number of times the acquisition condition corresponding to the prior information stored in the pre-article information storage means is satisfied, and the specific display mode is continuous. The number of times displayed is determined in an identifiable manner, and when the number of times is determined by the specific display number determination means, it corresponds to each of the first information stored in the determination information storage means. all SANYO displayed once each over two said dynamic display mode for continuous display in the gaming machine has been displayed until then by the specific display mode is displayed When the identification information is hidden, it is possible to display the identification information in a position smaller than the identification information in which the alternative mode corresponding to the identification information is displayed at a position visible to the player. There is .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table 1, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table 2. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead count lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead effect selection table, and (c) is an effect content command selection table. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the advance notice data table 1, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the advance notice data table 2, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the advance notice data table 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the data table 3 schematically. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the look-ahead notice 1 displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the look-ahead notice 2 displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example, (c) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the look-ahead notice 3 displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing the timing at which the pre-reading notice display mode is displayed when the number of pre-reading notices is 4, and (b) is the timing chart showing the pre-reading notice display mode when the number of pre-reading notices is 3. It is a timing chart showing the timing to be displayed. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect lottery process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead command processing for display which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a notice number selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a SW scenario table in the second embodiment. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect selection table 1 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect selection table 2 in the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure variation 1 which is an example of the variation pattern in the second embodiment, and (b) is an example of the variation pattern in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content of the figure variation 2 schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the content of the special figure variation 3 which is an example of the variation pattern in 2nd Embodiment schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of special figure variation 4 which is an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram which is an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content of variation 5 schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the advance notice data table 1 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the advance notice data table 2 in the second embodiment. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the notice data table 3 in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the notice data table 4 in the 2nd Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the advance notice number selection table 2 in the third embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an example of the SW scenario table 2 in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect selection table 3 in the 3rd Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect lottery process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect selection process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the status selection table according to the fifth embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of status information in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit-only fluctuation pattern in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit-only fluctuation pattern selection table (status B) in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the example typically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the example of the small hit exclusive variation pattern selection table (status C) in the fifth embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the small hit exclusive variation pattern selection table (status D) in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the small hit exclusive variation pattern selection in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the table (status E) schematically. It is a timing chart of the fluctuation display when the number of transition fluctuations in the fifth embodiment is three times. (A1) and (a2) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of variation 1 when the number of transition variation in the fifth embodiment is three, and (b1) and (b2) are diagrams of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the variation 2 when the transition variation | transition | transition frequency | transition | transition frequency of 3 times, and (c1-(A)), (c1- (B)) are It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of variation 3 in the case of 3 times. (C2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of variation 3 when the number of transition variation is 3 in the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram showing (d1- (A)), (d1- (B)) and ( d2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of variation 3 when the number of transition variation is 3 in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the status transition process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart of the variation display when there is no alternative variation display in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart of the variation display when there is an alternative variation display in the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern table in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table (status B) in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example schematically, and (c) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the small hit exclusive variation pattern selection table (status C) in the sixth embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the small hit exclusive variation pattern selection table (status D) in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the small hit exclusive variation pattern selection in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the table (status E) schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect time setting table in the sixth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an example of a maximum effect number determination table in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an alternative variation pattern table in the sixth embodiment, and (d) is an example of an alternative effect lottery table in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead lottery process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead effect lottery process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the status command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the alternative effect lottery process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 6th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a top view which showed the part of the inside of the variable winning apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the above, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entries is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, the winning or not judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

When it becomes "big hit A" and "big hit B", it becomes a special game state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds, and after that, as an added value after the big hit, if it is "big hit A", it will be the next big hit. Until this happens, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the time is shortened for the normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the lottery is executed 100 times (until the fluctuation of the special symbol starts).

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time-saving state" (normal symbol time-saving medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "time reduction of the normal symbol" is made according to the type of the jackpot. The period of "state" is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened" depending on the type of jackpot, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed by hitting the normal symbol of. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and also shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol".

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice production will be performed by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of ball entry times is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that there are 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the number of times the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more, as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About look-ahead production>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various information (whether or not, stop type) is obtained based on the fact that the game ball enters the first entry port 64 and various counters are acquired for the reserved ball with the special symbol. , Fluctuation pattern) is determined (look-ahead) in advance. When the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command (big hit winning command or losing winning command) including various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect.

Here, the look-ahead effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (b), the look-ahead effect is a notice effect that is executed across fluctuations of the special symbol (third symbol). As the content of the advance notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, characters indicating the number of times of the look-ahead effect are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At that time, the background color of the characters is selected and displayed by lottery (blue, yellow, or red).

Specifically, a case where four times are selected in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 13A will be described as an example. A look-ahead is executed for the hold ball stored in the hold fourth area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the look-ahead effect is performed for the winning information command based on the look-ahead. When it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect, when the pre-reading effect 4 times is determined, the pre-reading effect as shown in FIG. 13A is executed over the fluctuation from the reserved 1st area to the reserved 4th area.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the look-ahead effect in which the number of look-ahead effects is 4, variation 1 (variation of the special symbol corresponding to the hold 1st area) and change 2 (in the hold 2nd area). The character "first time" shown in FIG. 12A is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the pre-reading effect of the notice 1 which is the first pre-reading effect (variation of the corresponding special symbol). This notice display is displayed before the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) in the fluctuation of the fluctuation 1 is stopped (while it is fluctuating), and it is a while even when the special symbol of the fluctuation 2 starts to fluctuate. During this period (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds), the notice is displayed.

Next, between the fluctuation 2 and the fluctuation 3 (variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved third area), the “second time” shown in FIG. 12 (b) is used as the look-ahead effect of the notice 2 which is the second look-ahead effect. Characters are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the change of the special symbol of variation 2 (third symbol) is stopped (while it is changing) as in the case of the first notice display, and the special symbol of variation 3 starts to change. Even if the timing is reached, it is displayed for a while (in the present embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds).

After that, between the fluctuation 3 and the fluctuation 4 (change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved fourth area), the "third time" shown in FIG. 12 (c) is used as the look-ahead effect of the notice 3 which is the third look-ahead effect. The characters are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the change of the special symbol of variation 3 (third symbol) is stopped (while it is changing) as in the case of the first and second notice displays, and the special symbol of variation 4 is displayed. Even when the fluctuation starts, it is displayed for a while (in the present embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds). When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the special symbol is hidden by the display of the advance notice effect, a small "○" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a substitute for the special symbol (third symbol). It is displayed, for example, blinks green and white during fluctuation, and when the special symbol stops, it is stopped and displayed in white indicating that it is out.

In this way, in the look-ahead effect, the stop display of the special symbol is hidden by the notice and the next variable display is started until the final number of times of the look-ahead effect is reached. It can be made to appear as if it is being continued. Therefore, it is possible to show the fluctuation effect without clearly showing the fluctuation of the deviation to the player, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is disappointed by the deviation.

In addition, the specific notice display mode (corresponding to notices 1 to 3) displayed in the look-ahead effect is displayed at high speed before the symbol determination period of one variation, as shown in the detailed diagram of FIG. 13 (a). The display starts when the state of the high-speed fluctuation period in which the symbol is displayed fluctuates is switched to the state of the low-speed fluctuation period in which the symbol is displayed at a low speed, or shortly before the switch. Then, the period during which the symbol is fixed and stopped is also displayed, the next fluctuation display is started, and the symbol is displayed all the time during the slow fluctuation period of the fluctuation. Notice 2 and notice 3 have the same structure.

This makes it possible to make multiple fluctuations appear as if one fluctuation is being displayed at a much higher speed. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations appear as if they are one fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol is hidden in the specific notice display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the specific notice display mode is displayed is one corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. The symbol may be reduced to a small size, or the symbol may be displayed in a small variation with a temporary symbol (for example, “○”, “×”, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the third symbol is hidden during the period when the specific notice display mode is displayed, but the start time of the variable display of the third symbol may be delayed. .. In this case, it is sufficient to suddenly start the variable display of the third symbol with high-speed fluctuation. With this configuration, the control load for displaying and controlling the third symbol can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, since the final variation of the look-ahead effect is configured to be a missed super reach or a jackpot reach, the player is displayed with a notice effect of the look-ahead effect. Then, the expectation for the big hit can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the look-ahead effect will be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, since the look-ahead effect is displayed at a timing prior to the timing when the symbol of the change is stopped, the player can see that the look-ahead effect is not performed at the start of the change as compared with the case where the look-ahead effect is performed at the start of the change. It is possible to suppress problems that cause disappointment at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the third symbol is hidden by the display of the notice effect, an alternative symbol (“○” in this embodiment) is displayed, so that the stop timing of the third symbol is substituted. It can be confirmed by the design. Here, since the alternative symbol is configured to be displayed smaller than the normal symbol, it is difficult to identify the alternative special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player who absolutely wants to know the stop timing of the special symbol, and for the player who wants to play according to the production of the game, it is difficult to understand the stop timing of the special symbol as designed. , It is possible to show the effect as if the variation is performed once at all the times of the look-ahead effect.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the special symbol is hidden by the advance notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol is stopped at the chances such as "3", "4", and "1". You may. Further, the special symbol may be configured to be displayed with a different symbol (for example, a character such as a girl's character symbol or a character such as a chance) different from the normal one.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the look-ahead effect, all the advance notice effects are configured to straddle two fluctuations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the one that straddles the fluctuation and the one that does not straddle the fluctuation are selected by lottery. It may be configured as. With this configuration, various notice effects can be performed. Further, the advance notice effect may be configured to be different depending on the result of the final round of the look-ahead effect (for example, when the pass / fail determination is a big hit, the advance notice effect that straddles the fluctuation is likely to be selected). With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine the winning / failing determination result from the mode of the advance notice effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of pre-reading effects is configured to be selected by lottery, but when a jackpot winning command is received, a larger number of pre-reading effects are selected. May be good. With this configuration, the player can expect a larger hit by displaying the advance notice effect a larger number of times.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which it is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number "7,107,282" is a special symbol for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 30 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is set. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7B, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data are stored in four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, the original special symbol is used. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) before the original special symbol lottery is performed. Predicting the information is described as pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses these as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning / failing determination result (pre-reading determination result) determined by S407 of the start winning process (S106 in FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, is also reserved. It is stored in each of the first to fourth areas.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 17).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 17 and S405 in FIG. 19). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 21).

The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e.

Specifically, if it is determined to be "big hit B", it is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 17). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e becomes 0 (S217 in FIG. 17).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for the low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

The other memory area 203z is an area in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various other flags and data required for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical configuration of audio lamp control device 113>
The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores control programs required for various controls, various data, and the like. As a part thereof, a look-ahead effect lottery table 222a, a look-ahead count lottery table 222b, a look-ahead effect selection table 222c, and an effect content command selection table 222d are set respectively.

The look-ahead effect lottery table 222a is a data table for determining whether or not there is a look-ahead effect. It is composed of a look-ahead effect lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 7 (c) and a look-ahead effect lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 7 (d). The look-ahead effect lottery table 222a is a data table used for drawing with or without a look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is on in the process of S1603 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the look-ahead effect lottery table 2 is selected. A lottery for the look-ahead effect is performed (S1604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is off, the look-ahead effect lottery table 1 is selected and the look-ahead effect lottery is performed (S1605 in FIG. 29). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect lottery table 2 is set with a larger value of the effect counter 223h in which the pre-reading effect is selected, so that the pre-reading effect is easily selected. Therefore, when the jackpot winning command is received, the look-ahead effect is likely to be executed.

The look-ahead count lottery table 222b is a data table for determining the number of look-ahead effects as shown in FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the look-ahead count lottery table 222b. In the look-ahead count lottery table 222b, the number of look-ahead effects is selected based on the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the effect counter 223h. The number of pre-reading effects is selected with the upper limit as the value of the number of reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the look-ahead effect selection table 222c is based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (special figure fluctuations 1 to 5) of the final round of the look-ahead effect and the value of the look-ahead effect counter. This is a data table for determining the advance notice effects (effects 1 to 3). FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the look-ahead effect selection table 222c. The variation pattern of the special symbol on which the look-ahead effect is executed is shown as the special symbol variation 1 to 5 for simplification. In reality, any of effects 1 to 3 is assigned to each variation pattern. Further, the advance notice effect is not limited to the effects 1 to 3, and may be set as appropriate.

As the advance notice effect of the look-ahead effect, the effects shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, respectively. Specifically, in the advance notice effect of the effect 1, characters indicating the number of times corresponding to the number of times of the look-ahead effect (value of the look-ahead effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) are displayed, and the background color is blue. Is displayed. Similarly, in the advance notice effect of the effect 2, characters indicating the number of times corresponding to the number of times of the look-ahead effect (value of the look-ahead effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) are displayed, and the background color is displayed in yellow. To. In the advance notice effect of the effect 3, characters indicating the number of times corresponding to the number of times of the look-ahead effect (value of the look-ahead effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) are displayed, and the background color is displayed in red.

In this way, since the advance notice display modes (effects 1 to 3) that are selected for each number of pre-reading effects are set for the fluctuation pattern, for example, there are many red background colors for the jackpot fluctuation pattern. By setting it to be selected and setting it so that it is difficult to select the red background color for the deviation pattern (super reach), it is possible to give the player the expectation of a big hit with the background color. it can.

Further, if the number of pre-reading effects is large and the hit / fail judgment of the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot, a large number of red background colors are selected (that is, the value of the look-ahead effect counter is 3 for the jackpot fluctuation pattern. If this is the case, a large number of effects 3 are set, and for the deviation pattern, when the value of the effect counter is 3, the effect 1 or effect 2 is set to be selected more than the effect 3). Therefore, the more the advance notice display of the look-ahead effect is, the more the player can expect the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 8D, the effect content command selection table 222d is used to select a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of advance effect of the look-ahead effect (no effect or effects 1 to 3). Data table of. Specifically, in the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, if no effect is selected, the command "90h00h" is selected, and if effect 1 is selected, the command "90h01h" is selected and effect 2 is selected. For example, if the command "90h02h" is selected and the effect 3 is selected, the command "90h03h" is selected.

Then, as the display look-ahead command, if the first look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the first number of times is given to the command of 90h01h and the display look-ahead of 90h11h. The command is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the 90h01h command is set as the 90h21h display look-ahead command. Similarly, for the third time, the 90h01h command is set as the 90h31h display look-ahead command. The display look-ahead commands for the effects 2 and 3 are also set in the same manner.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a jackpot determination flag 223e, and a look-ahead effect counter. At least a storage area 223f, a look-ahead count counter storage area 223g, an effect counter 223h, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1409 in FIG. 27). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol hold ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is held.

The variation start flag 223c is set to on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 27), and when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is set to off (see S1702 in FIG. 30). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is set to on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 27), and when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. Is set to off (see S1607 in FIG. 30).

The jackpot determination flag 223e is a flag indicating that a jackpot winning command whose winning / failing determination result is a jackpot has been received from the main control device 110. The jackpot determination flag 223e is set to on in the process of S1411 of the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to off in the process of S1413. When the jackpot winning command is received, the jackpot flag 223e is set to on, and if the jackpot flag 223e is on in the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) to be executed after that, there is a look-ahead. The look-ahead effect lottery table 222a, which is easy to select the judgment, is selected. The jackpot determination flag 223e is a flag that is set to off in the initial setting when the power is turned on.

The look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is a storage area in which the value of the look-ahead effect counter is stored. The look-ahead effect counter is added one by one when it is set to have a look-ahead effect in the process of S1504 of the look-ahead effect selection process (FIG. 28, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the look-ahead effect counter is added one by one. It is stored in the counter storage area 223f. The look-ahead effect counter is set to 0 by default, and is incremented by 1 in order up to the upper limit value 4.

The look-ahead count counter storage area 223g is a storage area in which the number of look-ahead effects is stored. In the process of S1611 of the pre-reading effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of pre-reading effects acquired from the pre-reading number lottery table 222b is stored.

The effect counter 223h is a counter value used for a notice effect, a lottery for the presence or absence of the pre-reading effect from the pre-reading effect lottery table 222a, a lottery for the number of pre-reading effects from the pre-reading number lottery table 222b, and the like. The effect counter 223h is a counter value that is added and updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and is updated from the initial value of 0 to be an upper limit. It is repeatedly updated in the range up to the value 99. The effect counter 223d is a counter value that is set to 0, which is an initial value, when a power failure occurs.

The RAM 223 also has another storage area 223z that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<Electrical configuration of display control device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 31).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image (in the present embodiment, the power-on main image). (Characters during power-on) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" image is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" image is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by power-on. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images of "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the device is not used.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki and the helmet Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and thereby writes the image for one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and also notifies the player of the game value (the time saving period of the normal symbol) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol that is reserved. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 10). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

<Preliminary data table for look-ahead production>
Next, the details of the notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. The notice data tables 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c) are notice data tables for displaying the notice effect of the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c).

Specifically, in the notice data table 1 shown in FIG. 11A, the display of the “first time” shown in FIG. 12A is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing for a predetermined number of seconds (in the present embodiment). , It is a notice data table instructing to display during (3 seconds from 1.5 seconds before the change stop of the changing special symbol). In the notice data table 2 shown in FIG. 11B, the display of the “second time” shown in FIG. 12B is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing for a predetermined number of seconds (in the present embodiment, it is changing. It is a notice data table instructing to display for 3 seconds from 1.5 seconds before the change of the special symbol is stopped. In the notice data table 3 shown in FIG. 11 (c), the display of the “third time” shown in FIG. 12 (c) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing for a predetermined number of seconds (in the present embodiment, it is changing. It is a notice data table instructing to display for 3 seconds from 1.5 seconds before the change of the special symbol is stopped.

Similar to the display data table, the notice data tables 1 to 3 are set with various data necessary for the notice display. The notice data tables 1 to 3 select the notice data table based on the display look-ahead command based on the determination that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received the display look-ahead command. Actually, the notice data tables 1 to 3 are composed of three types of notice data tables 1 to 3 of the effects 1 to 3 having different background colors. That is, even if the notice data table 1 is used, the notice data table 1 has a blue background color (corresponding to the effect 1), the notice data table 1 has a yellow background color (corresponds to the effect 2), and the background color is red (the effect 3). The notice data table 1 of (corresponding to) is set respectively. The notice data table 2 and the notice data table 3 are also set in the same manner.

The advance notice data table selected based on the display look-ahead command is set in the advance notice data table buffer 233k of the display control device 114. Then, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the set advance notice display data table from the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stores it in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Further, the timekeeping data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the time data set in the notice display data table, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing set in the notice data table. The notice display mode displayed in the notice data table is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority over the display mode instructed in the display data table.

As a result, when the notice data table is set, the notice display mode is displayed 1.5 seconds before the change stop timing of the special symbol being displayed, so that it is set in the display data table for 3 seconds. The displayed display mode is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the notice display mode set in the notice data table is displayed. Therefore, the stop display of the special symbol can be hidden in the notice display mode, and even if the change start of the special symbol based on the next hold starts, the notice display mode is displayed for 1.5 seconds, so that the next change The display mode of the fluctuation start of the above can also be hidden by the advance notice display mode, and the player can be made to appear as if the two fluctuations are one fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the notification of the deviation has been made, and to show the player up to the change of the final round of the look-ahead effect. As a result, since the final round of the look-ahead effect is composed of a missed super reach or a variation mode of the jackpot, the player can enjoy the advance notice display mode while expecting that the fluctuation of the final episode is a jackpot. it can.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 14). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 12).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 14, in the example of FIG. 14). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the characters "Initial setting in progress", which are images at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on), on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 31) (see S1805 in FIG. 31). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 41 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 33 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 33B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 33B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 41 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 41 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 for each frame A drawing list (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 33 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 40) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 13) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 15, a rear image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol (not shown), notice display 1 to 3 of pre-reading effect), respectively. Detailed information corresponding to the sprite of is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side. As a result, when any of the notice data tables 1 to 3 is set, the corresponding notice display mode in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) is the most among the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed on the front side. Therefore, the notice display mode can be displayed in the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81 so as to hide the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the notice display mode is displayed on the foreground side by setting an image corresponding to the notice data table at the end of the drawing list, but the present invention is not limited to this and is based on the notice data table. When the image is set, it may be configured to set only the image based on the notice data table in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating a drawing list can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 33 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3008 in FIG. 38). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 42). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 42). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 43).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 43).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 24. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot A, the setting related to the jackpot A is executed (S213). In the setting related to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment) and the probability variation jackpot are set (S213). Further, in the case of the jackpot B, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time reductions (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and this process ends.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S217), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the processing of S221 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high probability state (during probability change) (S302). When in the high-probability gaming state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high-probability time (S304).

In the process of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ", and the value of the random number counter C1 per first and these hits If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the value for the low-probability time are used. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match. , Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S306.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S304 or S305 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S306: Yes). The display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) (S307). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the variation pattern table (not shown). Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by this fluctuation pattern table.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, various types of "disengagement", "normal reach disengagement", "super reach disengagement", and "special reach disengagement" are defined. Various "probability change jackpot normal reach", "probability variation jackpot super reach", and "probability variation jackpot special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, and various "normal jackpot normal reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot B. , "Normal jackpot super reach" and "Normal jackpot special reach" are stipulated.

In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S306: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation pattern of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine (variation time).

When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of a big hit) is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , It is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball slot 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S407 is executed.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the judgment of success or failure is made. Perform in advance (pre-reading judgment of winning / failing judgment result). In the process of S407, not only the hit / fail determination result but also the stop type and the fluctuation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding hold area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a.

If it is determined to be a big hit in the process of S407 (S407: Yes), a big hit winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the fluctuation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, a jackpot winning command corresponding to the super reach is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the deviation is out of the process of S402 (S407: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S409). In the process of S409, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S409: Yes), a missed reach winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern different from the super reach (S409: No), a missed winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S411).

When the winning information command is set, the winning information command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball slot 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Includes being in the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 7B).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 7B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. . In addition to setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is set to ON (S904), and if it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process is performed to S912. Move to. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 24, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed. .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. For example (S907: Yes), the power outage occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 17) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends, the first symbol display device The change display executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change start process (see FIG. 20), the second symbol display device 83 executes the process. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped at the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). Display (light up display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 is executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Control processing executed by MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 25, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 26) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1318. The power off processing flag is set to on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is set to off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 26). That is, since the power-off flag is set to on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, it is the start-up process of this time that leads to the process of S1208 with the power-off flag set to on. This is a case where the power is started after the momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag set to off via the processing of S1204 to S1206 because the startup processing this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing of S1208 is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display setting process of S1312, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1317), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power off processing, the occurrence of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1311), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402). Next, the look-ahead effect selection process is executed (S1403). The pre-reading effect selection process (S1403) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28, but when it is set to execute the pre-reading effect (set to have the pre-reading effect), the number of pre-reading effects is set. The process of determining and setting the display look-ahead command based on the determination is executed.

After S1403 is executed, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1404), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1409 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1409 to the special symbol reserved ball counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1409 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1408, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410). When it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S1411). After that, the look-ahead effect lottery process is executed (S1412). The details of this look-ahead effect lottery process (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect when the look-ahead effect is not executed (set to no look-ahead). The process of determining whether or not to be drawn is executed. After the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) is executed, the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to off (S1413).

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the jackpot winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not the missed reach winning command has been received (S1414). If it is determined that the missed reach winning command has been received (S1414: Yes), the look-ahead effect lottery process is executed (S1412). After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1414, if it is determined that the missed reach winning command has not been received (S1414: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is determined. Is executed (S1415), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a look-ahead effect selection process (S1403), which is one process of the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead effect selection process (S1403).

In the look-ahead effect selection process (S1403), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern determined to have been received by the voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot variation pattern (S1501). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot (S1501: Yes), both the look-ahead effect counter and the look-ahead count counter are initialized and set (S1502). Further, although not shown, when the process of S1502 is executed, it is set without the look-ahead effect. After that, this process ends. In this way, if the jackpot fluctuates, the pre-reading effect is not set, and the pre-reading effect counter and the pre-reading count counter are set so that the pre-reading effect is not executed until the pre-reading effect is set again for subsequent fluctuations. It is initialized and set without look-ahead. As a result, in the fluctuation of the jackpot, the notice display mode of the look-ahead effect is displayed from the timing 1.5 seconds before the special symbol stops fluctuating, and the player is informed that the jackpot is a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent a problem that is not notified by the special symbol to be displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of determining whether the variation pattern received by the voice lamp control device 113 is incorrect (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is set. Whether or not this look-ahead effect is set is determined by whether or not the look-ahead effect flag is set to ON in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The look-ahead effect flag is set to on in the process of S1610 of the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) described later.

In the process of S1503, if it is determined that no look-ahead effect is set (the look-ahead effect flag is off) (S1503: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is set to have the look-ahead effect (S1503: Yes), the look-ahead effect counter is incremented by 1 and stored in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f (S1504). The look-ahead effect is acquired based on the look-ahead effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 8B) and the value of the look-ahead counter stored in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f. Here, for example, if the variation pattern received by the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern indicating the special figure variation 1 and the value of the look-ahead counter is 1, the look-ahead effect of effect 1 (background color is blue) is selected. To. From the value of the selected look-ahead effect, the display look-ahead command to which the number of times is given is selected (set) from the effect content command selection table 222d (S1506).

Here, if the look-ahead effect of effect 1 is selected in the process of S1505 and the first look-ahead effect (the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the first number of times for the command of 90h01h. Is given and a display look-ahead command for 90h11h is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the 90h01h command is set as the 90h21h display look-ahead command. Similarly, for the third time, the 90h01h command is set as the 90h31h display look-ahead command. The display look-ahead commands for the effects 2 and 3 are also set in the same manner.

Therefore, when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives the display look-ahead command from the voice lamp control device 113, the advance notice display mode of the look-ahead effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display look-ahead command is the number of times. It is possible to determine whether it is a notice display and select and set a notice data table corresponding to the background colors of the effects 1 to 3.

After the processing of S1506 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f is the same as the value of the look-ahead count counter stored (set) in the look-ahead count counter storage area 223g. (S1507). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead effect counter and the value of the look-ahead count counter are the same (S1507: Yes), the look-ahead effect flag of the other storage area 223z is set to off and set to no look-ahead effect. , The pre-reading counter storage area 223g is set to 0, which is an initial value (initializes the pre-reading counter). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead effect counter and the value of the look-ahead count counter are different (S1507: No), this process ends.

In this way, when it is set to execute the look-ahead effect, the display look-ahead command is set so that the advance notice display (number of times display) of the look-ahead effect based on the number of times is displayed. Further, the background color is selected from the look-ahead effect selection table 222c according to the selected variation pattern. Here, the look-ahead effect selection table 222c is configured so that the content of the effect selected is changed depending on the type of the variation pattern of the final round of the look-ahead effect. More specifically, the effect 3 having a red background color is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern has a longer fluctuation time. Further, the shorter the fluctuation time, the easier it is to select a blue or yellow background color. Further, when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected, the effect 3 having a red background color is easily selected even when the number of look-ahead effects is small (the value of the look-ahead effect counter is small). ..

In addition, since the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is set in many cases such as a special reach in which the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, when the effect 3 of the red background color is displayed, the player can perform the early stage (first time or 2). You can play the game with the expectation that the special reach of the hit will be executed from the notice display of the pre-reading effect of the first time. Further, in the look-ahead effect selection table 222c, as the number of look-ahead effects increases (the value of the look-ahead effect counter is large), the effect 3 having a red background color is more likely to be selected, and conversely, the number of times of look-ahead effects decreases. (The smaller the value of the look-ahead effect counter), the easier it is to select effect 1 and effect 2, which are blue and yellow background colors. Therefore, the player can easily identify the number of times of the look-ahead effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a look-ahead effect lottery process (S1412), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead effect lottery process (S1412).

In the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1312), first, from the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, among the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area , It is determined whether there is a fluctuation in the jackpot or the missed super reach (S1601). Here, in the winning information storage area 223a, pre-reading pass / fail determination information, stop type, and fluctuation pattern information are individually stored according to the number of reserved items based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110. Therefore, it is determined based on the information.

If it is determined in the process of S1601 that there is no change in the jackpot or missed super reach (S1601: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation that is the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot or the missed super reach is reserved (S1601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set in the variable N (S1602). It is determined whether the value of the look-ahead count counter stored in the look-ahead count counter storage area 223g is greater than 0 (S1603). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead count counter is greater than 0 (S1603: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead count counter is 0 (S1603: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag 223e is off. When it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is off (S1604: Yes), the look-ahead effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7C) is set as the lottery table (S1605). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is on (S1604: No), the look-ahead effect lottery table 2 (see FIG. 7D) is set as the lottery table (S1606).

The lottery result is acquired based on the look-ahead effect lottery table set in the process of S1605 or S1606 and the value of N (number of reserved balls) set in S1602 (S1607). Specifically, for example, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is "3" and the look-ahead effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7 (c)) is selected, the effect counter 223h A value is acquired, and if the value is any of 0 to 69, it is determined that there is no look-ahead effect, and if it is any of 70 to 99, it is determined that there is a look-ahead effect.

It is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S1607 has a look-ahead effect (S1608). If it is determined that there is no look-ahead effect (S1608: No), the look-ahead effect counter is initialized (set to 0), set in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f, and the look-ahead count counter is initialized (set to 0). Set) and set the look-ahead count counter storage area to 223 g (S1609).

On the other hand, in the process of S1608, when it is determined that the lottery result has the look-ahead effect (S1608: Yes), the look-ahead effect flag indicating that the look-ahead effect is present is set to on, and the value of the look-ahead effect counter is initialized. (Set to 0) and stored in the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f (S1610). The number of pre-reading is determined based on the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b) and the effect counter 223h from the pre-reading number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A), and is stored in the pre-reading effect number storage area 223g. (S1611). To specifically explain the determination of the number of look-aheads, for example, when the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball count counter) is "3", the effect is produced from the look-ahead number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A). If the value of the counter 223h is any of 0 to 29, the look-ahead count "1" is acquired, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of 30 to 59, the look-ahead count "2" is acquired and the effect is produced. If the value of the counter 223h is any of 60 to 99, the read-ahead count "3" is acquired.

It is determined whether the variation corresponding to the last number of look-aheads acquired in S1611 is the variation of the jackpot or the missed super reach (S1612). This determination is made based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the last number of times. When it is determined that the fluctuation of the last number of read-aheads is a fluctuation pattern of a jackpot or a missed super reach (S1612: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the last number of times is a fluctuation other than the jackpot or missed super reach (S1612: No), the look-ahead is read so that the last fluctuation of the look-ahead effect is the fluctuation of the jackpot or missed super reach. The number of times is set (S1613).

In this way, the number of look-ahead effects is determined by lottery so that the number of look-ahead effects is random. It is possible to prevent a problem that the display is displayed, but the effect that the player has a higher expectation for the jackpot than usual is not displayed. Therefore, the player can have a greater expectation for the jackpot when the notice display of the look-ahead effect is displayed, and can play the game with the expectation that the look-ahead effect will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1404 of the command determination process (see FIG. 27). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 27), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

In the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to the process of S1710. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the accurate stop type (complete loss, front-rear out-of-reach, jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B), etc.).

In the process of S1710, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control processing executed by MPU 231 of the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 31) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S1902 and S1902, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 31. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. Is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 41 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 41 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33 (b)), a simple command determination process is performed so that an image at power-on (main image at power-on or variable image at power-on), which is not shown, is drawn. (See S2108 in FIG. 33 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 33 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (a). FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (b). FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal production image. Is executed on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

In the display setting process (S2103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instruction to be transferred. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 42.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined in the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306).

After that, the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing. By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 34. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2403).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2105), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 34. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not the display look-ahead command is received (S2208). If it is determined that the display look-ahead command has been received (S2208: Yes), the display look-ahead command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the display look-ahead command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this display look-ahead command processing (S2209).

In the display look-ahead command processing (S2209), first, the notice data table corresponding to the received display look-ahead command is determined and set in the notice data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display look-ahead command is set so that the effect content of the look-ahead effect and the number of times of look-ahead can be identified. Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects a notice data table corresponding to the number of times of the look-ahead effect indicated by the display look-ahead command and the effect content. For example, if the display look-ahead command is the first look-ahead effect number of times and is "90h11h" indicating the effect 1, the notice data table 1 of the effect 1 is selected.

The advance notice transfer data table corresponding to the advance notice data table set in the process of S2501 is determined and set in the advance notice transfer data table buffer set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Since the advance notice transfer data table has the same configuration as the display data table shown in FIG. 14, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Based on the notice data table set in the process of S2501, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer is initialized and set (S2504).

Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2208 that the display look-ahead command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), and an error occurs. If there is a command (S2210: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2211), and the process returns to the processing of S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing (S2211) executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing (FIG. 37, S2211), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 34. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2210 (S2210: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2212), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), Each process from S2202 to S2212 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2212 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 35 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process (FIG. 40, S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 38 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3017: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the image of the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the display is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3301 (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (b). FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3301, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33 (b)), instead of the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process, the command determination process (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting process (FIGS. 38 to 40). Since (see) is executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the image at the normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 42, S3303), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is acquired (S3501). Here, the information indicated by the pointers of the transfer data table of the display data table and the advance notice transfer data table of the advance notice data table is acquired, respectively. Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502), and if it is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3406, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Turn off (S3508),
In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The discrimination in the processing of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3517, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

Next, it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3514), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2105). Then, the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In the present embodiment, the advance notice display mode of the look-ahead effect is set so that the display order is in the foreground as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 13A to 13B, by displaying the look-ahead notice at a timing that straddles each variation (for example, variation 1 and variation 2), the variation of the special symbol can be stopped. It can be hidden and obscured by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player look as if the fluctuation of the jackpot or the out-of-order super reach executed in the final round of the look-ahead effect is performed by one fluctuation.

In this embodiment, the advance notice display mode of the look-ahead effect is set at the end of the drawing list (see FIG. 15) in order to be displayed in the foreground (front side of the special symbol (third symbol)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the data set in the notice data table is transferred, other display data may be configured not to be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, when the advance notice display mode of the look-ahead effect is set, it is not necessary to perform the process of setting other display information in the drawing list, so that the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 Can be reduced.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 33B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The look-ahead notice display mode is longer (or the same period) than during the low-speed variable display period displayed for about 3 seconds when the variable display of the special symbol (third symbol) is started, and the third It is displayed so as to hide the symbol (without displaying the third symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the display of the third symbol at high speed continues continuously, so that the fluctuation of a plurality of consecutive lottery games can be made to look like the fluctuation of one lottery game.

Further, as shown in the detailed diagram of the notice 1 in FIG. 13 (a), the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) is displayed at a low speed for a certain period from the start of the fluctuation, and then is displayed (dynamically displayed). After the variable display at high speed, the variable display is displayed again at low speed. Of the two fluctuation displays of the continuous lottery game, the look-ahead notice display mode is the fluctuation period of the special symbol at low speed displayed after the high speed fluctuation and the fluctuation of the special symbol at the low speed at the start of the fluctuation of the next lottery game. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over a period of time. Therefore, the display in high-speed fluctuation can be made to appear to continue across continuous fluctuations, and can be made to appear as one fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific advance notice display of the look-ahead effect is set to a fixed display time, but the display time is not limited to the fixed display time, and the display time may be changed according to a lottery or the like or display contents. Further, in addition to the display straddling the fluctuation, it may be configured to be displayed only during the fluctuation of one special symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 54. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the look-ahead and performs the look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the look-ahead has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the SW (switch) effect for executing the specific advance notice effect is set in advance in the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is set in advance. When the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing, the specific advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the specific advance notice effect is configured in a notice display mode for notifying the player of the number of times of the advance notice display, as in the pre-reading effect of the first embodiment. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
Since the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is based on the pre-reading effect lottery table 222a of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The pre-reading number lottery table 222b, the pre-reading effect selection table 222c, and the effect content command selection table 222d are deleted, and the advance notice number selection table 222e, the SW (switch) scenario table 223f, and the effect selection table 222g are added, respectively.

The notice number selection table 222e is a data table for determining the specific notice number shown in FIG. 45 (a). Specifically, the SW received in the process of S1412 of the advance notice effect selection process (FIG. 54, S1420), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S1420) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The number of advance notices set for the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern of the effect (in the notice number selection table, the special figure variation 1 to 5 is simply displayed).

As shown in FIG. 45B, the SW scenario table 222f is set next each time the valid time that is processed as valid by pressing the variable pattern frame button 22 of the selected SW effect elapses. This is a data table in which the effective time of the frame button 22 and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed are set.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c) and 48 (a) to (b), the SW effective time is predetermined for each SW effect variation pattern. This period is set in the SW scenario table 222f. It is set for each variation pattern of the SW effect, and when the effective time elapses, the next effective time and the number of times of pressing are set with reference to the SW scenario table 222f. In addition, it is set to be the same as the number of times of advance notice selected, and when the effect of the number of times is set, the END data indicating the end of the next data is set. This SW scenario table 222f is executed based on the fact that the SW effective time counter 223j is 0 in the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 52, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is referred to in the process of S1324.

As shown in FIGS. 46A to 46B, the effect selection table 222g is a data table for determining the background color of the specific advance notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The effect selection table 222g is composed of an effect selection table 1 and an effect selection table 2. The effect selection table 1 and the effect selection table 2 are configured so that the effect selection table 2 is easier to select yellow, green, and red background colors than the effect selection table 1.

In the effect selection table 222g, the frame button 22 is pressed within the effective time in the process of S1334 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 52, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect time is set. If the remaining time is 1.5 seconds or less, the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46 (a)) is selected, and if the remaining effective time is longer than 1.5 seconds, the effect selection table 2 is selected. Will be done.

Therefore, the type of the selected effect selection table 222g can be changed depending on the difference in the timing (early timing or late timing) when the player presses the frame button 22, so that the same SW effect variation pattern is selected. Even in that case, different notice effects can be displayed. Therefore, the notice effect displayed to the player becomes a certain pattern, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46 (a)) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46 (b)) are used to produce a background color in advance on the variation pattern of the SW effect selected. However, not limited to this, the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in a state where the remaining time of the effective time of the frame button 22 is longer than a predetermined time, that is, after the frame button 22 becomes effective. When pressed at an early timing, a red or green background color is likely to be selected when the hit / fail judgment result is correct based on the pass / fail judgment result of the special symbol, and blue when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect. Or yellow background color may be set so as to be easily selected. For details, in the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46 (b)), a large number of red and green background color effects are set for the variation pattern in which the hit / fail judgment result is correct, and blue is set for the deviation pattern. It can be realized by setting so that the effect of the yellow background color can be easily selected (the same as the effect selection table 1 may be used).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect selection table 222g has a configuration in which the background color is set in advance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the value of the advance notice counter 223i, but the background color is not limited to this, and the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is not limited to this. The counter value may be acquired based on the above, and the effect pattern of the background color may be selected based on the counter value. At this time, a plurality of selection tables in which the counter value is assigned corresponding to the notice counter 223i may be set, and the table may be selected according to the hit / fail determination and the pressing timing of the frame button 22. In such a case, the frame button 22 is pressed at the right time in the SW effect by configuring so that the red or green background color is more easily selected when the hit / fail judgment is successful and the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is earlier. By doing so, the player can see the effect based on the winning / failing judgment earlier, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the winning information storage area 223a, the jackpot determination flag 223e, the look-ahead effect counter storage area 223f, and the look-ahead effect number storage area 223g are used with respect to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. , The effect counter 223h has been deleted, and the advance notice counter 223i, the SW (switch) effective time counter 223j, and the SW (switch) press count counter 223k have been added, respectively.

The notice counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of times of the specific notice display in the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect. As the display of the specific notice display, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, characters indicating the number of times of the notice display are displayed in the background color selected from the effect selection table 222g as in the first embodiment. ..

The warning counter 223i is added and updated one by one in the processing of S1336 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 52, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The notice counter 223i is initialized to 0, which is an initial value, when the number of notices is selected from the notice number selection table 222e.

The SW effective time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the effective time of the frame button 22. The SW effective time counter 223j is set with a preset SW effective time period based on the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect set in the SW scenario table 222f. When the effective time elapses, the next effective time is set based on the SW scenario table 222f.

The SW press count counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the SW effective time. In the present embodiment, the number of SW presses set in the SW scenario table 222f is set in the SW press count counter 223k, and when the counter is pressed within the effective time, the number of times is subtracted (see S1331 in FIG. 52).

In the present embodiment, the number of SW presses set in the SW scenario table 222f is set to "1". Therefore, when the SW is pressed once, the value of the SW press count counter 223k becomes 0, and the display notice command is set. .. Here, if the number of SW presses is set to a plurality of times such as 5, for example, in the SW scenario table 222f, the display notice command is set unless the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times set within the valid time. It is possible that the specific notice display is not displayed. Therefore, if the number of times the SW is pressed in the SW scenario table 222f is set variously, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed until the notice display is displayed can be made different each time, which gives the player a fresh effect. Can be provided.

Furthermore, by making the number of presses set in the SW scenario table different based on the result of determining whether or not the selected fluctuation pattern is correct, the player is expected to win the jackpot by the number of presses until the notice display is displayed. Can be made. Specifically, it can be realized by configuring so that a relatively large number of presses is set when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and a relatively small number of presses is set when the result is a miss. In addition, even if it is off, by configuring it so that a large number of presses is set with a low probability, even if the hit / fail judgment result is off, a large number of presses are set, and there is an expectation for a big hit. Can be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment>
The notice data table of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is replaced with the notice data table of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c)), and FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) and FIGS. The notice data tables 1 to 4 shown in 50 are set. This is mainly due to the increase in the types of background colors, and since there is no change in the first embodiment and the detailed configuration, detailed description will be omitted. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is one process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The start winning process (FIG. 19, S105) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 51, S120).

The start winning process 2 (S120) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S120). In the start winning process 2 (FIG. 51, S120) in the second embodiment, each process from S407 to S411 is deleted from the start winning process (FIG. 19, S105) in the first embodiment. Since each process from S401 to S406 is the same as each process from S401 to S406 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 52, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) in the first embodiment, since the input monitoring of the frame button 22 is controlled only in the same manner as in the prior art, detailed description omission is omitted. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 52, S1307) in the second embodiment, when the variation pattern of the SW effect is selected, the SW effective time (see FIG. 45 (b)) shows the SW effective time (see FIG. 45 (b)). SW valid period) is set, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) within the valid time, and if it is pressed, the process of setting the corresponding display notice command is executed. It differs from the first embodiment.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 52, S1307), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223j is 0 (S1321). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223j is 0 (S1321: Yes), the SW press count counter 223k is set to 0, which is the initial value (S1322). The SW scenario counter is added by 1 (S1323). The SW scenario counter is a counter value set in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is one by one in order from the initial value of 0. Will be added. The SW scenario counter is set to 0, which is an initial value, based on the determination that the SW effect variation pattern command has been received in the process of S1424 of the advance notice effect selection process (FIG. 54, S1420) described later. Will be done.

The SW scenario is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern received from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45B) and the SW scenario counter (S1324). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect is received and the SW effect is executed, the SW scenario counter is set to 1 which is the initial value, and 1 is added in the process of S1323 to obtain the SW scenario counter. The value is 2. For example, assuming that the variation pattern of the SW effect being received is the special figure variation 2, No. 1 from the SW scenario table 222f shown in FIG. 45 (a). The SW scenario of the special figure variation 2 corresponding to 2 (effective time 3 seconds, SW press count 1 time) is selected. Here, the set valid time is a detailed valid period, and a detailed period of 3 seconds of 5 seconds to 8 seconds in the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set. In the special figure variation 2, the specific notice effect is executed twice.

In the process of S1325, it is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1324 is END data (S1325). If it is determined that the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1324 is END data (S1325: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW scenario is not END data (S1326: No), the SW effective time and the number of SW presses are acquired from the SW scenario. As the SW effective time acquired here, as described above, within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect, the SW effective period for validly setting the pressing of the frame button 22 is set next.

The SW effective time counter 223j is set to the period during which the next frame button 22 acquired in the process of S1326 is valid (S1327). The SW press count counter 223k is set to the SW press count acquired in the process of S1326 (S1328).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1321 that the SW effective time counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1321: No), the SW effective time counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1329). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1330). In the process of S1330, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1330: Yes), the value of the SW press count counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1331). It is determined whether the SW press count counter 223k has a value larger than 0 (S1332). Here, by executing the determination of the SW press count counter 223k, in the present embodiment, the number of presses set in the SW scenario table is all set to 1, but the number of presses is set to a plurality of times such as 3 times, 5 times, and the like. If it is set to, the processing when the SW is pressed is not executed until the value of the SW pressing counter 223k becomes 0 in the processing of S1332, and the SW effect is specified by pressing the game button 22 a plurality of times. It can be configured to display a notice display.

When it is determined in the process of S1332 that the SW press count counter 223k is a value larger than 0 (S1332: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining effective time of the SW effective time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less. (S1333). When it is determined that the remaining effective time of the SW effective time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less (S1333: Yes), the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) is set (S1334). On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining effective time of the SW effective time counter 223j is longer than 1.5 seconds (S1333: No), the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) is set (S1335). ).

As a result, after the SW effective time is set so that the pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid, the frame button 22 is pressed at an early timing (early time elapsed) (that is, the remaining time of the effective time). 2) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) are selected, so that the effect 3 which is the red background color can be easily selected. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed at a late timing (that is, the remaining time of the effective time is small), the effect selection table 1 is selected, so that it becomes difficult to select the effect 3 which is the red background color. Therefore, the effect selected can be different depending on the timing of pressing the game button 22, and various effects can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the frame button 22 is pressed at an early timing, if the result of determining whether the fluctuation pattern is correct or not is correct, the red effect 3 is selected. Easy to set. On the other hand, if the timing of pressing the game button 22 is late, even if the result of determining whether the variation pattern is correct or not is a big hit, it is more difficult to select it than when the red background color is pressed earlier. If the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the red background color is set to be easier to select if the button is pressed earlier, but the red background color is set to be easier to select if the button is pressed earlier or later than if the color is a big hit. Set so that the background color is not easily selected. With this configuration, the player can quickly obtain advantageous information (before the special symbol stops fluctuating) by pressing the frame button 22 early, and predicts the result of the hit / fail judgment to some extent. You can enjoy the game. Therefore, it is possible to have a large expectation for a big hit in the specific notice display mode, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation for the game.

The description of FIG. 52 will be continued. The notice counter 223i is updated by adding 1, and the background color is selected from the effect selection table 222g selected in S1334 or S1335 based on the value of the notice counter 223i (S1336). A display advance notice command is set based on the background color selected in the process of S1336 and the value of the advance notice counter 223i (S1337). The display notice command is generated by a command that can identify how many background colors are used in the specific notice display. Based on this display notice command, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has notice data corresponding to the background color and the number of times of the specific notice effect from the notice data tables shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) and 50. Select a table. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1330 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1330: No), the value of the SW effective time counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S1337).

Next, the command determination process 2 (S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2020). Each of the processes S1401 to S1402, S1404 to S1409, and S1415 in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) in the second embodiment is S1401 to S1402, S1404 in the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1312) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of ~ S1409 and S1415 is executed. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1401). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1402), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1404). The fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S1404 is determined to be a fluctuation pattern in which the SW effect is executed (S1419).

Here, the fluctuation pattern in which the SW effect is executed is set to a fluctuation pattern in which the hit / fail determination result is a big hit and a fluctuation pattern in which the result is a missed super reach in the present embodiment. With this configuration, when the specific notice display mode of the SW effect is displayed, it will always be a big hit or a missed super reach, and the specific notice display mode will make the player expect the big hit. be able to. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the specific notice display will be executed, and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

If it is determined in the process of S1419 that it is a fluctuation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), the advance notice effect selection process is executed (S1420). The details of the advance notice effect selection process (S1420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54, but a process of setting the SW effective time and the number of times the SW is pressed for executing the SW effect is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a notice effect selection process (S1420), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect selection process (S1420).

In the advance notice effect selection process (FIG. 54, S1420), first, the number of advance notices is selected based on the type of variation pattern received from the advance notice number selection table 222e (see FIG. 45A) (S1421). The SW scenario is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern selected from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45A) and the SW scenario counter (S1423).

The value of the SW scenario counter is initialized to 1 which is the initial value (S1424). The SW effective time and the number of times the SW is pressed are acquired from the SW scenario based on the SW scenario counter (S1425). Here, the acquired SW effective time is set to the period during which the game button 22 is first valid (first time) within the fluctuation time. The effective time acquired in the process of S1425 is set in the SW effective time counter 223j. The SW press count counter 223k is set to the SW press count acquired in the process of S1425 (S1427).

In the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern for performing the SW effect is set in advance, and when the fluctuation pattern is selected, various settings for the SW effect are set, but the variation is not limited to this. When a pattern command is received, a lottery may be executed to determine whether or not to execute the SW effect. In this case, this lottery may be performed for all the fluctuation patterns, but by limiting the fluctuation patterns to reach, for example, if the SW effect is always executed, the reach effect is produced. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the frame button 22 is used to display the specific notice display, and when the player does not press the frame button 22, the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Do not show. In addition, even if the number of SW valid times that the player did not press is less than the number of notices of the specific notice set in advance in the fluctuation pattern, the display is made according to the number of times. It is configured. Specifically, in the advance notice number selection table 222e (see FIG. 45 (a)), the advance notice number corresponding to the special figure variation 4 is selected, and as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the four SW effective times are selected. Even if it is configured to be set, the player does not press the frame button 22 during the first and second SW valid times, but presses the frame button 22 for the first time during the third SW valid time. However, the first display shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. If the frame button 22 is pressed again at the next SW effective time, the second display shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. Then, the reach display such as super reach is started.

Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect according to the operation of the player. Therefore, when the player does not need the specific notice display, the game button 22 is not displayed unless the game button 22 is operated, and the game can be played according to the player's preference.

In the present embodiment, when the SW effective time is reached, characters, icons, characters, etc. indicating the SW effective time are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, voice, etc., or a voice indicating that the SW effective time is reached. Is output. Further, an LED or the like may be built in the frame button 22 or the like, and the frame button 22 itself may be turned on when the SW effective time is reached to notify the notification. With such a configuration, the SW effective time can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effective time and the display notice command is output, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is indicated by the display notice command. In addition to setting the notice data table, the variation mode after the specific notice display is displayed is randomly selected from the remaining time and displayed (corresponding to the switching means). Specifically, until the frame button 22 is pressed by the SW effect, the special symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation on the background screen in the mountains, and after the specific notice is displayed, the special symbol is displayed on the background screen of the riverside. Change to a display that fluctuates at high speed. In this way, when the specific notice display is displayed, the content of the subsequent effect on the third symbol display device 81 is also changed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

In the present embodiment, the background is changed after the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect and the specific notice is displayed. However, the background is not limited to this, and for example, the design of the design may be changed. It may be configured to have a reach display mode or to start displaying a super reach. Regarding this display, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may be configured to draw a lot based on the reception of the display notice command.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the case where the period during which the SW effective time is set is preset in the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, although the maximum number of times of specific notice display (number of times of SW effect) is set in the fluctuation pattern of SW effect, the period is not set. , The difference is that the specific notice display is displayed up to the maximum number of times by operating the game button of the player. The same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment>
Since the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113MPU221 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the advance notice number selection table 222e, the SW scenario table 222f, and the effect selection table 222g are deleted from the second embodiment, respectively, and the advance notice number selection table is deleted. 2 (222h), SW scenario table 2 (222i), and effect selection table 3 (222j) are added, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 56A, the notice number selection table 2 (222h) has a maximum specific notice display with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect (here, simplified by the special figure fluctuations 1 to 5). This is a data table in which the number of notices is set. The difference is that the number of notices is changed to the maximum value with respect to the notice number selection table 222e of the second embodiment. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the SW scenario table 2 (222i), as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the number of SW presses is set based on the fluctuation pattern and the value of the SW scenario counter. The difference is that the SW effective time is not set with respect to the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45B) in the second embodiment. Since the other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 57, the effect selection table 3 (222j) sets the time of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the background color and the specific notice display when the specific notice display is selected are displayed. It is a data table for selection. Each of the effects 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 57 is selected based on the value of the advance notice counter 223i and the value of the effect counter (same as that described in the first embodiment). It should be noted that the effects 1 to 4 are for determining the background color of the specific notice display and the effect time after the specific notice display is displayed, as in the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, after the specific notice display for 3 seconds is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the effect time when the MPU 231 of the display control device 81 is selected. The variation mode of the symbol is selected and the variation is performed.

Specifically, in the effect selection table 3 shown in FIG. 57, if the value of the advance notice counter 223i is 2 and the value of the effect counter is 15, the specific advance notice display of the effect 2 is selected, and the display advance notice based on the value is selected. The command is set. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the notice data table 2 (see FIG. 49 (b)) set with the yellow background color based on the display notice command, and performs the “second time” for 3 seconds. The specific notice display, which is a character, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a yellow background color. After that, as a production with a set production time of 4 seconds, a special symbol (third symbol) design is displayed by a lottery, for example, by changing from a wooden box to a car. During the production time, the character is displayed, and the production is continuously performed until the next display notice command is received. Further, in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a special symbol (third symbol) dedicated to reach, which is not normally displayed, may be displayed by using this effect time, a character, or the like. You may perform a specific effect in which is displayed. As a reach-only symbol, the same symbol is displayed on the left and right in normal times to notify the player of the reach, but the reach-only symbol selected during this production time is larger than the normal symbol. Only one reel is displayed, and a notification (for example, characters, etc.) that is reach is displayed on the symbol.

With this configuration, the player can be entertained by displaying a specific notice display, which is a different effect from the normal time, and the game can be enjoyed more without getting tired. It should be noted that the frame button 22 is not effective during this production time, and the player can be shown at least the production during this production time. Therefore, even if the player accidentally presses the frame button 22 continuously, it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect is skipped and the next effect is displayed before the effect is viewed.

In contrast to the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46 (a)) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46 (b)) of the second embodiment, the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57) of the present embodiment is The difference is that the background color is randomly selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, the SW effective time counter 223j is deleted from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment, and the SW effect time counter 223 m and reach. The previous second count counter 223n has been added respectively. Since other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect time counter 223 m is a counter for measuring the effect time after the specific notice display selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57). The SW effect time counter 223 m is decremented one by one in the process of S1357 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610) described later. When it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343: Yes in FIG. 58), the frame button 22 is effectively set if the number of seconds before the reach is 10 seconds or more.

As described above, the SW effect time counter 223 m is also a counter value for counting the prohibition period for prohibiting the operation of the frame button 22 during the effect time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being pressed during the effect time and skipping the effect.

In the present embodiment, the SW effect time counter 223 m is provided in order to always display the effect to the player during the effect time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the following specific notice display is displayed at the player's will. If it is configured so as to be possible, it is not necessary to provide the SW effect time counter 223 m. By doing so, it is possible to skip the production at the player's will, and it is possible to efficiently show the production to the player.

The pre-reach seconds counter 223n is a counter for counting the time until the selected SW effect variation pattern becomes reach and the reach display mode effect predetermined for the variation pattern is started. The pre-reach seconds counter 223n stores the acquired pre-reach seconds in the process of S1434 of the advance notice effect selection process 2 (FIGS. 61, S1430) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. Further, it is subtracted by 1 in the process of S1358 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610). Further, it is determined whether the number of seconds before reach is a predetermined number of seconds or more (10 seconds in this embodiment) (see S1344), and if it is 10 seconds or more, the frame button 22 is effective. On the other hand, if it is less than 10 seconds, the specific notice display of the effect 5, which is a notice display that develops into the reach effect, is selected. The pre-reach seconds counter 223n is set to 0, which is an initial value, in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

As a result, when the number of seconds before the reach is equal to or less than the predetermined number of seconds, the third symbol display device 81 can display the effect of notifying the player that the reach effect is always started. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the reach effect will start, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reach effect.

Since the other electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment are the same as those in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 58, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. S2610), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. ..

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 58, S2610), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1341). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1341: Yes), the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S1342). On the other hand, when the pre-reach seconds counter is 0 or less, that is, when it is determined to be 0 (S1341: No), the process of S1343 is executed. In the process of S1343, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is less than 10 seconds (S1344). When it is determined that the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is less than 10 seconds (S1344: Yes), a display advance notice command for the effect 5 for notifying that the reach effect is to be performed is set (S1345). After that, the SW press count counter 223k is initialized to the initial value 0 (S1346), the SW scenario counter is initialized to the initial value 0 (S1347), and the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is initialized to the initial value 0. (S1348).

In this way, when the number of seconds before reach is less than a predetermined number of seconds (less than 10 seconds in this embodiment), a notice command for display of effect 5, which is a development notice for notifying that the reach effect is executed, is set. .. As the notice display content corresponding to the effect 5, the display mode in which the background rotates in a spiral shape at high speed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the time when the reach starts.

In the present embodiment, the effect 5 is set as an effect to notify that the reach effect is started, but the effect is not limited to this, and the display indicating the number of times of the specific advance display may be displayed based on the value of the advance notice counter 223i. Good. With this configuration, more specific notice displays can be executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is 10 seconds or more (S1344: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1349). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1349: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1349: Yes), the SW press count counter 223k is subtracted by 1 to set. It is determined that the SW press count counter 223k is 0. When it is determined that the SW press count counter 223k is 0 (S1351: Yes), the effect lottery process is executed (S1352). The details of the effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. However, the effect content and the effect time of the background color are determined from the effect selection table 3, and a display notice command is set based on the determined content. The process to be executed is executed.

The SW effect time counter stores the effect time selected in the process of S1651 of the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) (S1353). The SW scenario counter is added by 1 (S1354), and the next SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the fluctuation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1355). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1355 is END information. If it is determined that the information is END information (S1356: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information is not END information (S1356: No), the number of SW presses is acquired from the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1355 (S1357). The SW press count counter 233k is set to the SW press count acquired in the process of S1357 (S1358). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effect pressing count counter is not 0 (S1351: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1343, when it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0 (S1343: No), the value of the SW effect time counter is subtracted by 1 (S1357), and the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is used. After subtracting 1 (S1358), this process ends.

In this actual embodiment, only when the SW effect time counter 223 m is not 0, the number of seconds before the reach is subtracted by 1 to update, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 ( The configuration may be such that the configuration is always updated every time FIG. 58 (S2610) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the effect lottery process (S1352), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. .. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this effect lottery process (S1352).

In the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352), first, the effect and the effect time are selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57) based on the values of the effect counter 223h and the advance notice counter 223i (S1651). A display advance notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect and effect time selected in S1651 and the advance notice counter 223i is set (S1652).

Next, the command determination process 3 (S2030) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2030). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2030) in the third embodiment, the advance notice effect selection process (S1420) is the advance notice effect selection process 2 (S1420) with respect to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) in the second embodiment. It has been changed to S1430). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the second embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S1419 that the extracted variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), the advance notice effect selection process 2 is executed (S1430).

The advance notice effect selection process 2 (S1430) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect selection process 2 (S1430). In the advance notice effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430), first, the maximum number of advance notices is acquired from the advance notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A) based on the fluctuation pattern (S1431). Next, the warning counter 223i is initialized to 0, which is an initial value (S1432). The SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 based on the values of the fluctuation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1433). The SW scenario is the number of SW presses or END information shown in the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) in the SW scenario counters (No. 1 to 7) and the fluctuation pattern.

Based on the fluctuation pattern, the number of seconds before reach is acquired from the advance notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A) and set in the number of seconds before reach counter 223n (S1434). The SW scenario counter is set to the initial value of 1 (indicating No. 1) (S1435), the number of SW presses is acquired from the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1432 (S1436), and the SW press counter is set to 223k. The number of SW presses acquired in the process of S1435 is set (S1437).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the variation pattern of the SW effect is selected, the maximum number of times of the specific notice display (SW effect) is set, and if it is the number of times, the player is arbitrary. By pressing the frame button 22 at the time (excluding during the production time), the specific notice display can be displayed. In the variation pattern of the SW effect, the third symbol display device 81 does not display the notification mode for notifying that the frame button 22 is in the valid period as in the second embodiment. As a result, the player cannot predict how many more times the specific notice display will be displayed, and can operate the frame button 22 with the expectation that the specific notice display will still be displayed. Further, after the specific notice display (3 seconds) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined effect (effect of the effect time selected in the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57)) is executed. Since this effect is selected from a plurality of effects preset in the display control device 114 according to the effect time, the effect is various, and a different effect is displayed each time the specific notice display is displayed. Further, if this effect is set according to the effect time (for example, a character is displayed and the character talks only for the effect time), the player can be notified that the effect time has elapsed. .. The player can operate the frame button 22 thinking that the specific notice display may be displayed again after the series of effects is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game operation of the player easy to understand.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a case where the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the player's operation by pressing the frame button 22 has been described. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not to display the specific notice display based on the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22 based on the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in. The same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Since the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a SW holding count counter 223o and a SW history count counter 223p are added to the third embodiment, respectively.

The SW holding count counter 223o is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the effective time (within the time when the pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid). The SW holding count counter 223o is a counter that counts the number of times the SW is pressed within the effective time of the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation pattern of the SW effect is received. In the process of S1447 of the advance notice effect selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440) executed when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the value is initialized to 0, which is the initial value. Further, in the process of S1381 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 63, S2620) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the frame button 22 is added one by one based on the determination that the frame button 22 is pressed. Will be done. In the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (FIG. 63, S2620), the counted value is saved and stored in the SW history counter 223p, which will be described later. The SW holding count counter 223o is set to 0, which is an initial value, in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

The SW history count counter 223p is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid period in one SW effect variation pattern. As described above, in this SW history counter, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is saved and stored in the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 63, S2620), so that the frame button 22 is stored. The number of presses is stored.

In the variation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the valid period, the next SW scenario (see FIG. 56B), which is a setting for displaying the next specific notice display, is set. When performing a lottery as to whether or not, the value of the SW history count counter is used. The details will be described later, but when the value of the SW history count counter is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, the next SW scenario is set.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2620) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2620). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S2620) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed in place of the process of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610) of the third embodiment.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 63, S2620), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1371). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1371: Yes), the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S1372). On the other hand, when the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is 0 or less, that is, when it is determined to be 0 (S1371: No), the process of S1373 is executed. In the process of S1373, it is determined whether the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373). When it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is less than 3 seconds (S1374). When it is determined that the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is less than 3 seconds (S1374: Yes), the value of the SW holding count counter 223o is saved (stored) in the SW history counter 223p (S1375). The SW press count counter 223k is initialized to the initial value 0 (S1376), the SW scenario counter is initialized to the initial value 1 (S1377), and the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is initialized to the initial value 0. (S1378).

In the process of S1374, when it is determined that the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is 3 seconds or more (S1374: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1379). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1379: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1379: Yes), the SW press count counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1380), and 1 is added to the SW hold count counter 223o (S1381). It is determined whether the SW press count counter 223k is 0 (S1382). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223k is not 0 (S1382: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW press count counter 223k is 0 (S1382: Yes), the effect lottery process is executed (S1352). Since this effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is the same process as that already described in the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is executed, the effect time of the SW scenario is set in the SW effect time counter 223 m (S1383). 1 is added to the SW scenario counter (S1384). The SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the fluctuation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1385). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1385 is END information (S1386). If it is determined that the SW scenario is END information (S1386: Yes), each process from S1375 to S1378 is executed, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1386 that the SW scenario is not END information (S1386: No), the value of the variable T is set to 0 (S1387). The value obtained by adding the value of the SW history number counter 223p and the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table to the variable T is acquired (S1388). The calculation (lottery) of T / 6 is executed (S1389). It is determined whether the calculation result (lottery result) of S1389 is 1 or more (S1390). When it is determined that the calculation result is 1 or more (S1390: Yes), the number of SW presses is acquired from the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1385 (S1389). The number of times the SW scenario is pressed is set in the SW press number counter 223k (S1390). On the other hand, in the process of S1390, when it is determined that the calculation result of S1389 is less than 1 (S1390: No), the process of S1375 to S1378 is executed, and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S1373, when it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223 m is not 0 (S1373: No), the value of the SW effect time counter 223 m is subtracted by 1 (S1393).

In this way, even if the SW scenario data selected from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) is not END information, if the value of the SW history count counter 223p is small, the next SW scenario can be set. Based on this, the number of SW presses is not set in the SW press count counter 223k. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is pressed next time, the specific notice display is not displayed. Next, since the next specific notice display is not displayed until the value of the SW history count counter 223p exceeds a predetermined value, the player who presses the frame button 22 many times even if the same maximum notice count is selected. The number of times the specific notice display is displayed increases, and the number of times the specific notice display is displayed can be reduced for the player who does not press the frame button 22 so much, and the effect can be changed depending on the player. As a result, various effects can be performed on the player.

Further, the maximum number of notices and the value of the SW history number counter 223p are added and divided by "6" which is the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A). When the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A) is selected, the calculation result is always 1 or more, and the specific notice display can be displayed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, the specific notice display is not displayed up to the maximum number of times even if the frame button 22 is pressed each time, and when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, the specific notice display is displayed regardless of the number of history times. , Can give the player unexpectedness.

Next, the command determination process 4 (S2040) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4. In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 64, S2040) in the fourth embodiment, the advance notice effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) is different from the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S1312) in the third embodiment. The selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440) has been changed. As for other processes, the same processes as those of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S1312) in the third embodiment are executed, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the advance notice effect selection process 3 (S1440), which is one of the commands in the command determination process 4 (FIG. 64, S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect selection process 3. In the advance notice effect selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S1448 is added to the advance notice effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) in the third embodiment. Each process from S1441 to S1447 in the fourth embodiment executes the same process as each process in S1431 to S1437 in the third embodiment. The detailed description of the same processing will be omitted. In the process of S1447, when the number of presses acquired in the process of S1446 is set in the SW press number counter 223k (S1447), the process of S1448 is executed. In the process of S1448, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is initialized to "0" which is an initial value (S1448). After that, this process ends.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 81. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the look-ahead and performs the look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the look-ahead has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, when a small hit different from the big hit is won, a variation pattern dedicated to after the small hit, which is different from the normal time, is selected for the reserved lottery game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the effect of displaying the fluctuations a plurality of times as if it were one lottery game is executed. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 67A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment has a jackpot random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a status selection table 202c, status information 202d, and a small hit-only variation pattern selection. Tables 202e are set respectively.

The jackpot random number table 202a sets the value of the first hit random number counter C1 which is determined to be a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "7,107,282" in the normal probability game state (low probability game state), and "4,11,28,38," in the high probability game state. 45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285 If it is any of "299", it is set as a jackpot determination value determined to be a jackpot (same as the first embodiment). Further, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of "0,1,2,3,5,6,8,9,10,12", it is determined as a small hit determination value. Is set as. It should be noted that this small hit is set to be included in the ones judged to be out of order in the hit / fail judgment, and is set as a kind of out of place. In the present embodiment, the small hit determination value is set from the out-of-order determination values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit may be set as a type of jackpot from among the jackpot determination values. Further, it may be set so as to be determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2 from the one determined to be a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won, the variable winning device 65 is opened twice for 0.5 seconds. The gaming state after the small hit (low-probability gaming state or high-probability gaming state) is set to the same gaming state as the gaming state before the small hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202b is a selection table for determining a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) for displaying the first symbol and the third symbol in a variable manner. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, each fluctuation pattern table is set for a low-probability gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a small hit only (including the number of transition fluctuations after the small hit).

Since the fluctuation patterns other than those dedicated to small hits are configured to be selected in the same manner as in the first embodiment, detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted. As for the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the small hit, as shown in FIG. 68A, the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the small hit selected when the hit / fail determination result is wrong and when the hit is hit is set. Details of each fluctuation pattern will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (b) to (c) and 69 (a) to (b), a variation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to small hits is set.

FIG. 68B is a selection table 202e dedicated to small hits, which is selected when the status flag B is determined at the time of winning small hits. In this selection table, a normal small hit variation pattern is selected for all variation type counters CS1. In this normal small hit variation pattern, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the chance eye such as "341", the variable winning device 65 is displayed for a predetermined period (0.5 s in the present embodiment). ), The small hit opening that is released is executed twice.

FIG. 68 (c) is a variation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to the small hit, which is selected when the status flag C is determined at the time of winning the small hit. When this selection table is selected, it is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 based on the value of the variation counter 203g. When the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 0, that is, when the small hit is won, the special small hit fluctuation pattern is set to be selected corresponding to the values of all the fluctuation type counters CS1. Here, the fluctuation counter 203g will be described in detail later, but is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations after a small hit. It should be noted that the small hit is selected as the small hit judgment value when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, so that the fluctuation pattern for the hit is not set.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the special small hit variation pattern is the third symbol display device as shown in FIG. 71 (a2) after the third symbol is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character "1st time" is displayed, the third symbol is reduced to the lower right and displayed, and is stopped and displayed at "341" indicating a small hit. In the present embodiment, "341" is used as the stop symbol indicating a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other stop symbols may be used, and a temporary symbol (for example, a musical note, etc.) different from the normal one may be used. It may be a combination of symbols, etc.).

Next, when the held lottery game starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to 1, so if it is out of the range according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, it corresponds to all the fluctuation type counters CS1. The out-of-reach start / end fluctuation pattern is set. This deviation reach start / end fluctuation pattern is displayed from the state in which the third symbol starts to fluctuate as shown in FIG. 71 (b1) after the display shown in FIG. 71 (a2), and is as shown in FIG. 71 (b2). In addition, after the same symbol is displayed in the reach display mode in which the same symbol is stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the reach symbol after a predetermined time, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is made. Is notified that was out of order.

On the other hand, when the next reserved lottery game is a win, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 170, the winning reach start / end variation pattern 1 is selected, and the value of the variation type counsel CS1 is set. If it is 171 to 199, the hit reach start / end variation pattern 2 is selected. The hit reach start / end variation pattern 1 and the hit reach start / end variation pattern 2 are different in that they are stopped by a symbol indicating a hit with respect to the above-mentioned off-reach start / end variation pattern.

FIG. 69A is a variation pattern selection table that is selected when the status flag D is determined at the time of winning a small hit. When the fluctuation counter 203g is 0, the special small hit fluctuation pattern is set corresponding to all the fluctuation type counters CS1. When the variation counter 203g is 1, if the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the deviation type counter CS1 is set to the deviation pattern 1 corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 160, and the variation type counter CS1 is set. The out-of-reach start variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the values 161 to 199.

The out-of-reach start variation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach start variation pattern 2 are displayed in a state in which the third symbol is changed as shown in FIG. 71 (b1), and as shown in FIG. 71 (b2). In the reach display mode, the variable display of the middle symbol is continuously displayed until the variable time ends.

On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result of the next held lottery game is a hit, the hit reach start / end fluctuation pattern 1 is set and fluctuates according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 170. The hit reach start / end variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the values of the type counter CS1 171 to 199.

In this way, when the status flag C is determined, the variable pattern selection table dedicated to the small hit is set to be selected from the small hit winning to the execution of the two lottery games. Even if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit due to a change in the middle, the hit / fail judgment result can be correctly notified.

Further, at the start of the fluctuation of the next reserved lottery game, the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to 2, so that if the winning / failing judgment result is incorrect, the fluctuation type counter 203g is set to 0 to 50. Correspondingly, the deviation reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set, the deviation reach fluctuation pattern 2 is set corresponding to 51 to 180 of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the deviation SP corresponds to 181 to 199 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The reach fluctuation pattern is set.

Here, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)), the characters "second time" are displayed in the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern 2, and the third symbol is reduced and started to be displayed. To. At this time, the third symbol, which is reduced and started to be displayed, is displayed in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)). After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the reach display mode is displayed, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 72 (c2), an effect is displayed around the middle symbol during the fluctuation of the middle symbol, and the reach display mode is different from the normal time. Is notified to the player.

Further, when the out-of-SP reach fluctuation pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)), the character "development" is displayed, and the third symbol is reduced and the display is started. The third symbol, which is reduced and started to be displayed, is displayed in the reach display mode. After that, a display mode for notifying the player that a special reach called "next notice crane reach" as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (B)) is displayed is displayed. After that, the display mode of the crane reach as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) is displayed, and the crane lifts the middle symbol that is the hit symbol, but it cannot be lifted and is dropped, and the symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed. A display mode indicating the deviation is displayed.

On the other hand, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 2, and the lottery game in which the hit / fail judgment result is a hit is started, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The hit reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. As for the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 2, and the hit SP reach fluctuation pattern, the hit / fail judgment results of the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern 1, the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern 2, and the out-of-SP reach fluctuation pattern are notified by hit. It is different in that.

FIG. 69B is a variation pattern selection table 202e that is selected when the status flag E is determined at the time of winning a small hit. The value of the fluctuation counter 203g up to 1 is the same as that of the selection table 202e (see FIG. 69A) selected in the case of the status flag D, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the value of the fluctuation counter 203g for which the number of transition fluctuations is the second is 2 and the result of the hit / fail judgment is out of order, the out-of-reach in-reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 165 of the variation type counter CS1. , The out-of-reach in-reach fluctuation pattern 2 is set corresponding to 166 to 199 of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (A)), the characters "third time" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the out-of-reach in-variation pattern 1 and the out-of-reach in-in-variation pattern 2. 3 The third symbol is reduced and started to be displayed in the reach display mode at the lower right of the display area of the symbol display device 81. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (c2), the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the reach display mode, and the display mode in which the middle symbol continues to fluctuate until the variation time elapses is displayed.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hit reach fluctuation corresponds to 21 to 150 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The pattern 2 is set, and the hit SP reach fluctuation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, in the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1 and the hit reach fluctuation pattern 2, the characters "third time" are set to be displayed at the start of the fluctuation. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

Next, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g at which the number of transition fluctuations is the third is 3 and the hit / fail determination result is out of order, the out-of-order Lee fluctuation pattern 1 corresponds to 0 to 140 of the variation type counter CS1. It is set, and the deviation reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to 141 to 170 of the variation type counter CS1, and the deviation SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 171 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, when the deviation reach fluctuation pattern 1 and the deviation reach fluctuation pattern 2 start to fluctuate, the characters "fourth time" are displayed. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the hit reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the variation type counter CS1, and the hit reach variation pattern corresponds to 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1. 2 is set, and the hit SP reach fluctuation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, when the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1 and the hit reach fluctuation pattern 2 start to fluctuate, the characters "fourth time" are displayed. Other display modes are the same as those already described above.

As described above, in the configuration of the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern so that the plurality of variations of the number of transition variations set in the status flag determined at the time of winning the small hit appear to the player as one variation mode. Is selected. Further, at the start of the fluctuation, display modes such as "first time" and "second time" are displayed, and related notification modes that make the fluctuation seem to be continuing are displayed, so that a plurality of fluctuations are displayed. Can be made to appear as if it were a variation. Further, in the display mode to be displayed at the start of the fluctuation, the display area of the third symbol is reduced and displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to notice that the third symbol has started to fluctuate, and the previous fluctuation still continues. It can make you feel as if you are.

In addition, the actual number of fluctuations for displaying multiple fluctuations as one fluctuation is determined by determining the status flag within the range of the number of holdings held at that time, triggered by a small hit. During that time, the dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table 203e is configured to be selected, so that it is possible to easily execute an effect of making a plurality of fluctuations appear as one fluctuation.

Further, the fluctuation pattern selected is set to change according to the number of transition fluctuations after the small hit is won, and in the final fluctuation, the display mode is set to show the lottery result from the reach display mode. It is easy for the player to think of the reach display mode when the small hit is won.

A status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are added to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment with respect to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment.

The status flag storage area 203f is a storage area for storing the status flag for determining whether or not it is the period for selecting the dedicated fluctuation pattern after the small hit in the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 67 (c), five types of flags A to E are preset for this status flag.

The status flag A is a flag indicating that the normal fluctuation pattern is in the selected period. The status flag B is a flag indicating that it is a period for selecting a fluctuation pattern dedicated to small hits once. Similarly, the status flag C selects the fluctuation pattern dedicated to small hits twice, the status flag D selects the fluctuation pattern dedicated to small hits three times, and the status flag D selects the fluctuation pattern dedicated to small hits four times. It is a flag indicating that it is a period to be used.

The status flag is drawn by lottery in the process of S421 of the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329), which is one of the processes in the special symbol change start process (FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Is selected from the status selection table 202c (see FIG. 67B).

Here, when the status flag is selected, it is stored in the status flag storage area 203f of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, when the power is turned off, the status flag storage area 203f is backed up and the storage is retained by supplying power from the backup power supply. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to return to the state immediately before the power is turned off. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the status flag A, which is the default setting, is set in the status flag storage area 203f.

The fluctuation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations after a small hit. The fluctuation counter 203g is added and updated one by one in the processing of S335 in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIGS. 75 and S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the processing of S337 in the special symbol variation start processing (FIGS. 75 and S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and S221 in the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 74 and S140), the initial value is reset to 0. The selection counter 203h is a counter that is sequentially updated by 1 within a range from 0, which is the initial value, to 99, which is the upper limit value. In the initialized state, the initial value of 0 is set. After being updated to the upper limit value of 99, if it is further updated, it is updated to the initial value of 0. Although not shown, the selection counter 203h is added and updated one by one in the process of S1011 of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the process of S421 of the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value of the selection counter 203h is acquired when the status flag (status) is determined from the status selection table 202c. To.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113>
A sub-variation counter 223r and a sub-status flag storage area 223s are added to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, respectively.

The sub fluctuation counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of transition fluctuations in synchronization with the fluctuation counter 203g provided in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is updated by adding 1 in the process of S1712 in the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, it is reset to 0, which is the initial value, in the process of S1714. In the present embodiment, although not shown, the initial value is reset to 0 based on the reception of the opening command notifying the start of the jackpot game output from the main control device 110.

The sub-status flag storage area 223s is a storage area for storing the status flag based on the status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status flag determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. .. The status flag based on the status command received in the process of S1451 in the command determination process (FIG. 78, S2050) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (set) in the sub-status flag storage area 223s.

<Regarding the variation display mode when the number of transition variations of this embodiment is set>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, an example of the variation display mode in the transition variation number set triggered by the small hit winning in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example in which a small hit is won and the status flag E is determined when the number of reserved pieces is stored in three or more.

In variation 1, it is determined that a small hit has been won, the status flag E is determined, and a special small hit variation pattern is selected. After the period indicated by a1 and the fluctuation display of the third symbol at high speed continued (see FIG. 71 (a1)), as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the character "first time" is the first in the period of a2. It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81, and the 3rd symbol is reduced to the lower right of the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and among the out-of-order symbols (designs different from the jackpot symbol) of "341", a specific chance eye. Confirmed stop is displayed with.

Next, in the variation 2, the case where the out-of-reach start variation pattern 1 or the out-of-reach start variation pattern 2 is selected is shown. As shown in FIG. 71 (b1), after the high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed in a predetermined period within the period of b1, the display is switched to the low-speed display, and the left symbol column is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (b2). The reach display mode in which the right symbol is similarly stopped at the "7" symbol, the left and right symbols are displayed with the same symbol, and the variable display of the middle symbol is continued is b2. The indicated period is displayed.

After that, the variation display of variation 3 is started. In the variation 3, the case where the variation pattern 1 during the out-reach and the variation pattern 2 during the out-reach are selected is shown. When the period indicated by c1 and the notice period c1 are set, the SW valid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 for 3 seconds is valid is set, and the frame button 22 is operated within that time, FIG. 71 ( As shown in c1- (A)), the characters "second time" are displayed until the end of the notice period c1. If the frame button 22 is not operated even after the SW validity period has elapsed, a cut-in display mode in which the characters "development" are displayed is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)). ..

In this way, by making the display mode displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 different from the display mode displayed when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the frame button 22 can be displayed by the player. You can increase the enjoyment of operating.

After the notice period c1 ends, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2), the reach display mode displayed with the same symbol as the reach symbol displayed in the variation 2 is displayed. Here, in the reach display mode displayed by the variation 3, an effect or the like is displayed on the middle symbol, and an effect different from that of the variation 2 is executed.

After the variation time of variation 2 has elapsed, the variation display mode shown in variation 4 is displayed. Variation 4 shows a case where either the out-of-SP reach variation pattern or the hit SP reach variation pattern is selected. Of the period indicated by d1, 3 seconds is set as the SW valid period. When the frame button 22 is operated within the SW valid period, the characters "third time" are displayed until the end of the notice period, as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (A)). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated during the SW valid period, the cut-in display mode in which the characters "next notice crane reach" is displayed is displayed as shown in FIG. 72 (d1- (B)). Will be done. Then, in the period of d2, a special reach display mode (SP reach display mode) is displayed in which a display mode in which the jackpot symbol is lifted by a crane as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, the number of transition fluctuations is determined, and a dedicated selection table is provided so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number of fluctuations is different from the normal fluctuation pattern. Configured to set. Therefore, it is possible to show by combining a plurality of variation display modes as if a plurality of variation displays (lottery games) set for the number of transition fluctuations from the variation display mode of small hits are one variation display mode. ..

Further, according to the number of transition fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern of the display mode that is continuous with the fluctuation display displayed before that is selected, so that the player can see more than one fluctuation as one fluctuation. Can be shown to. Therefore, in reality, even if the lottery game is out of order, the game can be played while maintaining the degree of expectation for the big hit.

In addition, at the time of winning a small hit, it is possible to easily display a variable display mode different from the normal time, and by making a small hit to the player, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation for the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent getting bored with the game by the next big hit game.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. It should be noted that only the changes are shown with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, and the illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

FIG. 73 describes the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) has been changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140). Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the special symbol variation process 2 (S140), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 18, S208) is special to the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 17, S104) in the first embodiment. In the symbol variation start processing 2 (FIGS. 75 and S220), the processing of S215 is changed to the processing of S221, and the processing of S222 to S223 is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S213 or S214 is executed, the process of S221 is executed. In the process of S221, the start of the jackpot game is set (similar to the first embodiment), the fluctuation counter 203g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status flag A is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f. ..

Further, in the process of S211 if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S222). Here, in the determination of whether or not it is a small hit, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 is the same as the above-mentioned small hit determination value. In the process of S222, when it is determined that the small hit has been won (S222: Yes), the start of the small hit game in the small hit is set. Here, the operation of moving (opening) the variable winning device 65 for a predetermined period (0.5 s in the present embodiment) is set twice. On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the hit is a deviation other than a small hit (S222: No), the process of S216 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the special symbol variation start process 2 (S220), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (S220). The special symbol variation start processing 2 (FIG. 75, S220) in the fifth embodiment is each of S328 to S331 and S334 to S337 with respect to the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment. Processing has been added. Since each process of S321 to S327, S332 to S333, and S338 to S339 is the same process as each process of S301 to S312, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S325, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is out of order (S325: No), it is determined whether the hit / fail determination result is a small hit (S328). If it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a small hit (S328: Yes), the status transition process is executed. (S329).

Here, the status transition process (S329) will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this status transition process (S329).

In the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329), first, the status flag (status) is determined from the status selection table (see FIG. 67 (b)) based on the current number of pending items and the value of the selection counter 203h (S421). .. It is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag B (S422), and if it is the status flag B (S422: Yes), the status flag B is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S423).

On the other hand, in the process of S422, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag B (S422: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag C (S424). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag C (S424: Yes), the status flag C is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S425).

On the other hand, in the process of S424, if it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag C (S424: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag D (S426). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag D (S426: Yes), the status flag D is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S427). On the other hand, in the process of S426, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag D, that is, the status flag E is determined (S426: No), the status flag E is set in the status flag storage area 203f. (Remember) (S428). After that, a status command indicating the status flag set in any of the processes of S423, S425, S427, and S428 is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S429).

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 75. After the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329) is executed, the display mode to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a small hit is set (S330). After that, the small hit variation pattern is determined from the small hit dedicated variation pattern selection table 202e based on the status flag stored in the status flag storage area 203f and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, after any of the processes S327, S331, and S333 is executed, the process of S334 is executed. In the process of S334, it is determined whether the status flag 203f stored in the status flag storage area 203f is a status flag other than the status flag A (that is, any of the status flags B, C, D, and E). In the process of S334, when it is determined that the status flag is other than A (S334: Yes), the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is updated by adding 1 to the value of the fluctuation counter 203g (S335), and the updated value of the fluctuation counter 203g is set. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations set in the status flag (see FIG. 67 (c)) (S336). When it is determined that the fluctuation counter 203g has a value equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations (S336: Yes), the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is reset to 0, which is the initial value, and the status flag A is set to the status flag storage area 203f. It is set (S337). After that, the process of S338 is executed. Further, in the processing of S336, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is less than the number of transition fluctuations (S336), and in the processing of S334, when it is determined that the status flag A is set (S334: No), the process of S338 is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. It should be noted that only the changes are shown with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and the illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

The main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The main process (FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a frame with respect to the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) is displayed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (FIGS. 80 and S2630), and the command determination process (FIG. 27 and S1311) is displayed in the command determination process 5 (FIG. 78 and S2050). The setting process (FIGS. 30 and S1312) has been changed in the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79 and S2060). Since the other processes are the same as the processes in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 5 (S2050) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S2050). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 78, S2050) in the fifth embodiment, each process from S141 to S1414 is deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1311) in the first embodiment, and S1450 to S1451 are deleted. Each process up to is added respectively. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S1408 that the hold command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the status command output from the main control unit 110 has been received (S1450). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1450: Yes), the status flag indicated by the status command is set in the sub-status flag storage area 223s (S1451). On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1450: No), the process of S1415 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the variation display setting process 2 (S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S2060). In the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) in the fifth embodiment, each process from S171 to S1714 is added to the variation display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment. There is. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1706: No) or after the process of S1710 is executed, the process of S1711 is executed. In the process of S1711, it is determined whether the status flag stored in the sub-status flag storage area 223s is other than the status flag A, that is, any of the status flags B, C, D, and E (S1711). .. If it is determined that the status flag is other than A (S1711: Yes), the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1712).

It is determined whether the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations set in the status flag (S1713). When it is determined that the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is equal to or greater than the number of transition fluctuations (S1713: Yes), the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is reset to the initial value 0, and the status is set in the sub-status flag storage area 223s. The flag A is set (S1714). On the other hand, in the process of S1713, when it is determined that the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is less than the number of transition fluctuations, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 80, S2630) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S2630).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 80, S2630), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the SW effective time counter 223j is 0 (S1521). When a fluctuation pattern command is received, a predetermined SW valid time valid counter 223j is set for this SW valid time in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the SW effective time counter 223j is 0 (S1521: Yes), it is determined whether the SW press count counter 223k is a value larger than 0. The SW press count counter 223k is set to 1 based on the setting of the effective time counter 223j.

When it is determined that the SW press count counter 233k is a value larger than 0 (S1522: Yes), the value of the SW press count counter 233k is set to 0 (S1523), based on the value of the sub-variation counter 223r. , A display cut-in command for outputting to the display control device 114 is set (S1524). Based on this display cut-in command, for example, a cut-in display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (B)), a plurality of display modes are set for this cut-in display mode. On the other hand, in the process of S1523, when it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223k is 0 or less (S1522: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1521, when the value of the SW effective time counter 223j is determined to be a value other than 0 (S1521: No), the value of the SW effective time counter 223j is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1525). .. It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (S1526). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1526: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1527). When it is determined that the value of the SW detour counter 223k is larger than 0 (S1527: Yes), the value of the SW press counter 223k is subtracted by 1 (S1528), and the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is subtracted. A display notice command for outputting to the display control device 11 is set based on (S1529). On the other hand, in the process of S1526, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1526: No), or in the process of S1527, in the process of S1527, it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223k is 0 or less. If this is done (S1527: No), this process ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. It should be noted that only the changes are shown with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, and the illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2120). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 81, S2120) in the fifth embodiment, each process from S2208 to S2209 is deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment, and S2121 to S2124. Each process up to is added respectively. Since the other processes are the same as the processes in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2121, if it is determined that the display cut-in command has not been received (S2121: No), it is determined whether or not the display notice command has been received (S2123). If it is determined in the processing of S2123 that the display notice command has been received (S2123 :: Yes), the notice display data corresponding to the received display notice command is set in the display data table buffer (S2123 :: Yes). S2124). On the other hand, in the process of S2123, if it is determined that the display notice command has not been received (S2123: No), the process of S2210 is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol (at the time of executing the short-time game state, at the start of the high-probability game, at the start of the normal game (start of the low-probability game)) and at the time of winning the small hit It was configured to switch the table for selecting (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation pattern selection table is frequently switched, the fluctuation time and the like are frequently changed, and the gambling of the game becomes unstable.

Then, in such a configuration, when the small hit is won, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table dedicated to the small hit up to a predetermined number of fluctuations, which is a preference for the player. It is possible to give a changed effect.

Further, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is composed of an effect set to be continuous with the effect of the front-back variation pattern so that a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit appear as one variation. Since a variable pattern selection table dedicated to small hits is set so that multiple fluctuation patterns can be set and each fluctuation pattern can be combined and selected in order so as to be continuous, the player can easily make multiple fluctuations. It can be made to appear as if it were a variation.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits, which is selected when the small hit is won, the final fluctuation is executed with a fluctuation pattern that is easy to be selected when the winning / failing judgment result such as special reach or super reach is a big hit. Since it is configured so that the same effect as that of the table is executed, the player can increase the expectation for the jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of transition fluctuation times are set at the time of winning a small hit, and a lottery game that becomes a big hit in the middle of the number of times is included, the big hit is executed. , Since the number of transition fluctuations is reset, a series of fluctuations will be completed with a big hit, and after that, when a production that makes multiple fluctuations appear as one fluctuation is executed in the same manner. You can expect it to be a big hit. Further, even after the big hit, the continuous effect (for example, the effect of starting the fluctuation from the reach state) is continuously selected, so that it is possible to suppress a defect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are made so that the player can see the subsequent fluctuations of the special symbol as if they were one fluctuation of the special symbol. Since it is configured to combine the above, it is possible to make it appear as if it is a single deviation fluctuation even if it is a plurality of deviation fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player is disappointed that he / she is out of the game. In addition, since it is possible to configure a plurality of fluctuations including a fluctuation that becomes a jackpot to appear as if it is a single fluctuation, the fluctuation that the hit / fail judgment result displayed before the jackpot is out of order. Even so, it is possible to make it appear as if it is one fluctuation in combination with the fluctuation of the jackpot, so that the fluctuation of the deviation can be effectively used.

In the present embodiment, the number of transition fluctuations is determined within the number of reserved balls of the lottery game held at the time of winning the small hit, so that the plurality of fluctuations can be further changed into one fluctuation. It is configured so that it can be seen as. Not limited to this, it may be configured so that the number of transition fluctuations equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls is set so that the fluctuations appear to continue a plurality of times. In such a configuration, all fluctuations are in the reach state, and by performing an effect such as producing a chance of whether or not a lottery game that is a big hit can be started, more players can participate in the game. Can increase motivation.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 97. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the look-ahead and performs the look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the look-ahead has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, the number of transition fluctuations is determined with the winning of a small hit as an opportunity, and when the maximum number of executions of the effect determined within the number of transition fluctuations is executed, the rest remains. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the time is selected. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
The display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 (a) is a time chart showing a variable display mode when the status flag E is set at the time of winning a small hit when the alternative display mode is not set. In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit is won, the status flag is determined and the number of transition fluctuations is set as in the fifth embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 82A, the status flag E is set and the number of transition fluctuations is set to 3.

In the sixth embodiment, the special reach display mode set in the final variation of the number of transition variations (in the example shown in FIG. 82A, variation 4 corresponds to the variation start of variation 2) starts variation display. The period until it is done is set as the produceable time. Further, at the time of winning a small hit, the maximum number of times of production is set based on the winning / failing determination result and the value of the selection counter 203h. The maximum number of times of effect is set by setting the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one time by the player operating the frame button 22 during the effectable time. .. As the production content, characters such as "second time" and "third time" as shown in FIGS. 71 (c1- (A)) and 72 (d1- (A)) are displayed based on the number of productions. To. At that time, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right display area.

In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), the maximum number of times of effect is set to 3, but the advance notice effect is executed only up to 2 times, and the maximum number of times of effect is not reached. In this way, when the maximum number of effects is not reached, the reach display mode of the preset display mode of variation 4 is waited for the player to operate the frame button 22 until the playable time elapses. (In this embodiment, the special reach display mode (SP reach display mode)) is displayed.

In this way, based on the timing at which the player's frame button 22 is operated, the advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum number of effects. Here, as for the maximum number of effects, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the variation 4 is a hit, a larger number of times of the effect is selected. Therefore, the player operates the frame button 22 to determine the hit / fail earlier. The result can be predicted from the number of executions of the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more enjoyment of pressing the frame button 22.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (b), in the case of FIG. 82 (a), the display mode when the advance notice effect is executed up to the maximum number of times of effect will be described. FIG. 82B is a time chart showing a case where the advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum number of effect times. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 82B, the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation 3, and the third advance notice effect, which is the maximum number of productions, is sent to the third symbol display device 81. It is what is displayed. In this case, an alternative variation display mode closer to the remaining time is selected based on the remaining time until the variation display ends. The details of this alternative variation display mode will be described later, but as shown in FIG. 86 (c), a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times are set in advance for each hit / fail determination result, and the variation pattern is closer to the remaining time. An alternative variation pattern for variation time is selected. The alternative variation pattern is configured with a special reach display mode in which a specific reach display mode is set, as shown in FIG. 72 (d2).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment>
In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, a jackpot random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a status selection table 202c, status information 202d, and a small hit-only variation pattern selection table 202e are set.

Since the jackpot random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the status selection table 202c, and the status information 202d are the same as those already described in the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit-only variation pattern selection table 202e in the sixth embodiment is shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (b). The normal small hit fluctuation pattern and the special small hit fluctuation pattern in the small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern in the sixth embodiment are the normal small hit fluctuation pattern and the special small hit fluctuation pattern configured in the same display mode as the fifth embodiment. Each is composed of fluctuation patterns. In the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 to 3, the third symbol is configured in a non-reach display mode from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is different for each. The disengaged SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 are configured with a special reach display mode including a reach display mode such as a crane reach display mode as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) described in the fifth embodiment. Further, the hit SP reach fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 are different from the missed SP reach fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 in that the hit / fail determination result is displayed as a hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 84 (b) is a table selected when the status flag B is selected, and similarly, dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 84 (c). The fluctuation pattern table 202e of the above is the status flag C, and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to the small hit shown in FIG. 85 (a) is the fluctuation pattern selection table dedicated to the small hit shown in the status flag D, FIG. 85 (b). 202e is a table that is selected when the status flag E is selected. Since the method of selecting each variation pattern is the same as the method already described in the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, respectively, with respect to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Has been done. Since all of them have the same configuration as those already described in the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment has an effect time setting table 222k, a maximum number of times determination table 222m, and an alternative variation pattern with respect to the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. A table 222n and an alternative effect lottery table 222p have been added, respectively. Further, although not shown, the selection table of each fluctuation pattern set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is also set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the fluctuation pattern selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 from the winning command output from the main control device 110. Even when the fluctuation pattern selection table is switched according to the number of holds, the change pattern that becomes reach or super reach according to the value of the change type counter CS1 is fixed regardless of the number of holds, so that the voice lamp can be read ahead. It is possible to determine the fluctuation in which the MPU 221 of the control device 113 becomes reach or super reach.

The effect time setting table 222k is data for setting the effect time (display time) of the notice display displayed in the variation pattern dedicated to small hits displayed by the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 86 (a). It is a table. As the number of times increases, the production time is set longer. When a lottery game that is a big hit is included in the lottery game corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations, it is easy to select a larger number of production times than when the lottery game is not included. Therefore, the player can predict the winning / failing determination result based on the number of productions, and when a large number of productions are selected, the player can play the game with a higher expectation of a big hit. As the notice effect displayed here, as described in the fifth embodiment, a display mode for notifying the number of effects as shown in FIG. 71 (c1- (A)) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode is used to notify the number of times the advance notice effect is produced, but the display mode is not limited to this, and the temporary third symbol or the like is displayed to display the pseudo reach effect or the temporary third symbol is stopped and displayed. Such a display may be executed to make it appear as if more lottery games have been performed, or an effect of displaying a character or the like may be performed.

The maximum number of effects determination table 222m is a data table for determining the maximum number of advance notice effects displayed during the display of the small hit dedicated variation pattern in which the number of transition variations is set by the third symbol display device 81. The maximum notice number determination table 222m is a lottery corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations set in the processing of S2264 in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIGS. 96, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The maximum number of times of effect is determined based on the result of determining whether the game is successful or not and the value of the effect counter 223h. As a result, the maximum number of productions, which is larger when the winning lottery game is included in the lottery game executed during the transition variation number of times, is determined. Therefore, by executing a lot of advance notice effects, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the alternative variation pattern table 222n is a data table in which the variation time of the alternative variation pattern is set. As an example of the alternative variation pattern, the out-of-SP reach variation pattern 1, the out-of-SP reach variation pattern 2, the per-SP reach variation pattern 1, and the per-SP reach variation pattern 2 are set.

The alternative effect lottery table 222p is a data table for determining whether or not to set an alternative variation pattern when the advance notice effect is executed a maximum number of times. In this alternative effect lottery table 222p, the value of the effect counter 223h so that the alternative variation pattern is more easily set when the lottery game that is a hit during the transition variation number is included than when it is not included. Is assigned.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment has a SW press count counter 223k, a sub-status flag storage area 223s, a total time storage area 223t, an effectable time storage area 223u, and a reach variation time storage area 223v. , The effect count counter 223w is added respectively.

The SW press count counter 223k has the same configuration as that described in the second embodiment, and the sub-status flag storage area 223s has the same configuration as that described in the fifth embodiment. The explanation will be omitted.

The total time storage area 223t is a storage area in which, when the number of transition fluctuations is set, the total variation time of the lottery game corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations is stored. The total time storage area 223t is a variation of each variation pattern corresponding to the number of transition variation (value of the look-ahead counter) in the process of S2253 of the effect setting process (FIG. 95, S2075) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The total time is set.

The effectable time storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the time during which the notice effect can be displayed when the number of transition fluctuations is set. The effectable time storage area 223u is a value set in the total time storage area 223t in the process of S2261 in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (FIGS. 96, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value obtained by subtracting the reach seconds of the final fluctuation of the number of transition fluctuations is stored. Further, in the process of S2276, the effectable time is subtracted and updated based on the elapsed time.

The reach fluctuation time storage area 223v is a storage area for storing the reach fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in which the number of transition fluctuations (pre-reading count) is set. In the reach variation time storage area 223v, the number of reach seconds is stored in the process of S2252 in the effect setting process (FIG. 95, S2075) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The effect count counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of notice effects. The effect number counter 223w is set to the maximum effect number when the maximum effect number is determined from the maximum effect number determination table (see FIG. 86 (b)). It is subtracted and updated by 1 in the processing of S2275 in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 96, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and reset to the initial value of 0 in the processing of S2269. Will be done.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. It should be noted that only the changes are shown with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, and the illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

The timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment is the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The special symbol variation process (FIGS. 17, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIGS. 74, S140), and the start winning process (FIG. 19, S105) is changed to the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150), respectively. ing. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) has the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start winning process 3 (S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 3 (S150). In the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150) in the sixth embodiment, each process from S407 to S411 is deleted from the start winning process (FIG. 19, S105) in the first embodiment, and the look-ahead lottery process is performed. (FIG. 89, S430) has been added. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A look-ahead lottery process (S430), which is one process in the start winning process 3 (FIGS. 88 and S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead lottery process (S430).

In the look-ahead lottery process (FIG. 89, S430), first, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S406 in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is determined at the start of fluctuation. (S431). If it is determined to be a jackpot (S431: Yes), a jackpot winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S431, if it is determined that it is out of order (S431: No), it is determined whether it is a small hit (S433). If it is determined to be a small hit (S433: Yes), a small hit winning command that can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. (S434).

On the other hand, in the process of S433, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that becomes a super reach (S435). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S435: Yes), an out-of-reach winning command capable of discriminating the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S406 is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. It is set to be outputable (S436). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern does not result in super reach (S435: No), an out-of-winning command indicating the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set (S437).

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that only the changes are shown with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and the illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

The main process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment is the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) is assigned to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (FIGS. 96 and S2640), and the command determination process (FIGS. 27 and S1311) is assigned to the command determination process 6 (FIG. 91 and S2070). The variable display setting process (FIGS. 30 and S1312) has been changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79 and S2060), respectively. The variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) is the same process as that already described in the fifth embodiment, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 6 (S2070) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 6 (S2070). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 91, S2070) in the sixth embodiment is S141 to S1414 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Each process up to is deleted, and each process from S2071 to S2075 is added. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1408, if it is determined that the hold command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2071). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2071: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S2072).

The winning command receiving process (S2072) will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S2072). In the winning command reception process (FIG. 92, S2072), first, the winning command indicating the value of the received variation type counter CS1 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2081).

It is determined whether the received winning command is a jackpot winning command (S2082). When it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S2082: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S2083). After that, the process of S2085 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning command is not a jackpot winning command (S2082: No), it is determined whether the received winning command is a missed reach winning command (S2084). If it is determined that the command is a missed reach winning command (S2084: Yes), the look-ahead effect lottery process 2 is executed (S2085). The details of the look-ahead effect lottery process 2 (S2085) will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. After the look-ahead effect lottery process 2 (FIG. 93, S2072) is executed, the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to off (S2086). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2084, if it is determined that the command is not a missed reach winning command (S2084: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the look-ahead effect lottery process 2 (S2085), which is one of the winning command reception processes (FIG. 92, S2072) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead effect lottery process 2 (S2085). In S2222 to S2234 in the look-ahead effect lottery process 2 (FIG. 93, S2085) in the sixth embodiment, the same process as in the look-ahead effect lottery process (FIGS. 29, S1412 S1601 to S1613) is executed, and further. , The process of S2221 is added to the process of the first embodiment.

In the process of S2221, it is determined whether or not the lottery game that is a small hit, that is, the small hit winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (holding area). When it is determined that the small hit winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2221: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2221, when it is determined that the small hit winning command is not stored (S2221: No), the process of S2222 is added.

Returning to FIG. 91, the description will continue. If it is determined in the process of S2071 that the winning command has not been received (S2071: No), it is determined whether the status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2073). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S2073: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S2074).

The status command reception process (S2074) will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this status command reception process (S2074).

In the status command processing (FIG. 94, S2074), first, it is determined whether the received status command is a status command indicating the status flag B (S2241). When it is determined that the status flag B is set (S2241: Yes), the status flag B is set in the sub-status flag storage area 223f, and the look-ahead count counter is set to 0 (S2242). It is set without look-ahead (S2243), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag B (S2241: No), it is determined whether the received status command is a status command indicating the status flag C. (S2244). When it is determined that the status flag C is set (S2244: Yes), the status flag C is set in the sub-status flag storage area 223f, and the look-ahead count counter is set to 1 (S2242). Although the illustration is omitted, after that, it is set to have look-ahead, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag C (S2244: No), it is determined whether the received status command is a status command indicating the status flag D. (S2246). If it is determined that the status flag is D (S2246: Yes), the status flag D is set in the sub-status flag storage area 223f, and the look-ahead count counter is set to 2 (S2247). Although the illustration is omitted, after that, it is set to have look-ahead, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag D, that is, the status flag E (S2246: No), the status flag E is set in the sub-status flag storage area 223f. The look-ahead count counter is set to 3 (S2248). Although the illustration is omitted, after that, it is set to have look-ahead, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 91, the description will continue. After the status command reception process (FIG. 94, S2074) is executed, the effect setting process is executed (S2075). After that, this process ends. The effect setting process (S2075) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 95.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this effect setting process (S2075). In the effect setting process (FIGS. 95, S2075), first, based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the value of the look-ahead count counter set in the look-ahead count counter storage area 223g, only for small hits. The fluctuation pattern information is reacquired from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222 (S2251). As a result, the pre-read information can be updated corresponding to the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the small hit selected by the main control device 110 when the small hit is won.

When the process of S2251 is executed, the reach time of the final fluctuation corresponding to the value of the look-ahead count counter is set in the reach fluctuation time storage area 223v (S2252). The total variation time of each variation pattern selected in each lottery game corresponding to the look-ahead count counter is set in the total time storage area 223t as the total variation time (S2253).

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2640) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 96, S2640).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (FIG. 96, S2640), first, as the effectable time in the effectable time storage area 223u, the total variation time stored in the total time storage area 223t is changed to the reach variation time storage area 223v. A value obtained by subtracting the stored reach seconds is set (S2661). It is determined whether the effectable time set in S2661 is a value larger than 0 (S2662). When it is determined that the effectable time is a value larger than 0 (S2662: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect number of the effect count counter 223w is set (S2663).

If it is determined that the number of times of effect is set (S2663: Yes), the process of S2265 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of effects is not set (S2663: No), it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the number of pre-reads for which the maximum number of effects is set from the maximum number of effects determination table 222 m. The maximum number of times of effect is determined based on the hit / fail determination information and the value of the effect counter 223h, and is set in the effect number counter 223w (S2264).

In the process of S2265, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is a value other than 0, the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 to update (S2266), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223w is 0 (S2267). If it is determined that the value of the effect count counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: Yes), the alternative effect lottery process is executed (S2268). Here, the alternative effect lottery process (S2268) will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this alternative effect lottery process (S2268). In the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268), first, it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281). When it is determined that the total fluctuation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the lottery result is acquired from the alternative effect lottery table 222p (see FIG. 86 (d)). To do.

It is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S2282 has a substitute (win) (S2283). When it is determined that the lottery result has alternatives (S2283: Yes), it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284). If it is determined that the total fluctuation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284: Yes), the outlier SP reach variation pattern 2 or the hit SP reach variation pattern 2 is determined based on the determination result, and the corresponding display command is determined. Is set (S2285). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2284, when it is determined that the total fluctuation time is 30 seconds or less (S2284: No), the out-of-SP reach variation pattern 1 or the per SP reach variation pattern 1 is determined based on the determination result. Then, the corresponding display command is set (S2286). After that, this process ends.

In this way, when the notice effect is displayed up to the maximum number of times for which the notice effect is set on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining total fluctuation time at that time is determined, and the variation display of the alternative variation pattern is possible. If it is time, the lottery will determine whether to display the alternative variation pattern. Here, the lottery for displaying the alternative variation pattern is executed based on the winning / failing determination result of the changed lottery game, and if the winning / failing determination result is a hit, the alternative variation pattern is more than in the case of being out of order. Since it is set to be easy to display, the player can have an expectation for a bigger hit by displaying the alternative fluctuation pattern. Further, when the remaining time of the total fluctuation time is long, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player has to wait for a long time until the reach display mode of the final fluctuation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In the present embodiment, if there is a remaining time until the fluctuation time elapses after the alternative fluctuation display mode is displayed, all the third symbols are shaken and fluctuated with the fluctuation display stopped. It waits until the fluctuation time elapses. After that, a fixed stop is displayed based on the elapse of the fluctuation time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the display mode is more natural until the player stops.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. After the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268) is executed, the effect count counter 223w is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S2269). The value of the effectable time storage area 223u is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S2270). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2267, when it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S2271). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S2271: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223k is greater than 0 (S2272). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223k is larger than 0 (S2272: Yes), the value of the SW press count count 223k is subtracted by 1 (S2273), and the value of the effect count counter 223w. A display notice command corresponding to is set (S2274). The value of the effect count counter 223w is subtracted by 1 (S2275), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not pressed in the processing of S2271 (S2271: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S2272 that the value of the SW pressing count counter 223k is 0 or less (S2272: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, the player is made to show the change of the special symbol a plurality of times thereafter as if the change of the special symbol is one time. Since it is configured to combine fluctuation patterns, it is possible to make it appear as if it is a single deviation fluctuation even if the fluctuation is a plurality of deviations. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player is disappointed that he / she is out of the game. In addition, since it is possible to configure a plurality of fluctuations including a fluctuation that becomes a jackpot to appear as if it is a single fluctuation, the fluctuation that the hit / fail judgment result displayed before the jackpot is out of order. Even so, it is possible to make it appear as if it is one fluctuation in combination with the fluctuation of the jackpot, so that the fluctuation of the deviation can be effectively used.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the effect of making the plurality of fluctuations appear as if they are one fluctuation, the player's frame button 22 displays a plurality of notice displays (displays of the first time, the second time, etc.). Since it is configured to be displayed based on the operation, it can be configured so that different effects are given to each player depending on the operation timing of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the same production.

In addition, the maximum number of times the notice display is displayed is configured so that a larger number of times is selected in the case of a big hit based on the result of the winning / failing determination. The result of the hit / fail judgment can be predicted in advance, and the enjoyment of the game can be further increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the notice display of the maximum number of times is displayed, an alternative fluctuation pattern that approximates the time is selected and displayed according to the remaining time until the last round of fluctuation is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored and to give the player an effect according to the fluctuation time.

In addition, the alternative variation pattern is not always selected, but is drawn based on the result of winning / failing, and when it is a big hit, the alternative variation pattern is easily selected. Therefore, the alternative variation pattern is displayed. , You can expect the player to be a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the notice display is configured to display characters such as the first time and the second time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after displaying the characters of the first time, at a preset time or the like. , A special symbol (a symbol dedicated to reach, a symbol in which the pattern of the symbol is changed, etc.) may be displayed in a variable manner, or a character or the like may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the notice display.

In the present embodiment, the number of transition fluctuations is determined within the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the small hit, and within that number, the fluctuations of a plurality of special symbols including the small hit are made to appear as if they are one variation. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the number of transition fluctuations equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls may be set, and the fluctuation effect may be performed in a continuous fluctuation pattern within that number of times. In such a case, for example, as a chance effect that the variation pattern starts to change from the reach state every time within the number of transition fluctuations, it is configured to execute an effect as to whether the player can start the fluctuation that becomes a big hit. You may.

In such a configuration, every time the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the small hit that starts to fluctuate in the reach state starts to fluctuate, the player is notified of the number of times that the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the small hit starts to fluctuate continuously. May be good. With this configuration, the player wants to start a lottery game that is a big hit while this chance effect is executed, and can continue the game.

In the present embodiment, the status command determined by the main control device 110 is output, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines the status flag to be executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It may be configured to execute the same process as the process to be performed. By configuring in this way, the number of commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the hit / fail determination result and the jackpot type from the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In such a case, by setting a dedicated fluctuation pattern command for each type such as jackpot A and jackpot B, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can easily determine the jackpot type from the fluctuation pattern command. Can be done. Therefore, the number of commands output by the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 106. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the look-ahead and performs the look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations based on the result of the look-ahead has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 releases the variable winning device 65, the variable winning device 65 is opened before the variable winning device 65 is opened. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it executes a process that hinders the operation. The same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the variable winning device 65 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. The variable winning device 65 receives a game ball that rotates about 90 degrees toward the front side of the game board 13 and falls on the game board surface, and a rotating door 620 for taking the game ball inside the variable winning device 65. And a plunger link 610 that rotates the rotating door 620 forward based on the operation of the solenoid 600 (209). The plunger link 610 has a shaft portion 610b and is rotatably fixed inside the variable winning device 65.

One end of the plunger link is fixed to the tip of the plunger 600a of the solenoid 600, and when the solenoid 600 is electrically operated and the plunger 600a is sucked, the plunger link 610 is rotated around the shaft portion 610b. .. The plunger link 610 is provided with a locking portion 610a protruding toward the rotating door side, and the locking portion 610a and the rotating door 620 are unlocked by the rotation of the plunger link 610. , The rotating door 620 rotates 90 degrees toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to its own weight.

Further, as shown in the top view of a part of the inside of the variable winning device 65 of FIG. 99, the regulation solenoid 640 (209) is orthogonal to the solenoid 600 inside the variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. It is provided as follows. The regulation solenoid 640 is a push-type solenoid, and has a configuration in which the plunger 640a protrudes forward when electrically operated. When the regulation solenoid 640 operates and the plunger 640a protrudes, it comes into contact with the plunger link 610 and restricts the rotation of the plunger link 610.

Here, as shown in FIG. 98, when the plunger link 610 is rotated, the tip of the locking portion 610a is located on the upper portion of the locking recess 620b with the locking portion 610a provided on the back side of the rotating door 620. By slightly rotating the rotating door 620 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in contact with the wall portion, the center of gravity of the rotating door 620 shifts and the rotation starts under its own weight. The time t required for the locking portion 610a to come into contact with the upper wall portion of the locking recess 620b of the rotating door 620 is configured to be 50 ms.

Details will be described later, but less than 50 ms after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the winning of the small hit and activates the solenoid 600 to execute the opening process of the variable winning device 65 at the time of winning the small hit. The control for operating the regulation solenoid 640 is executed. As a result, when the small hit is won, the variable winning device 65 is opened, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining that the winning determination result is a small hit.

Further, even when the number of transition fluctuations is set at the time of winning a small hit to execute an effect of making a plurality of fluctuations appear as one fluctuation, the variable entry saving device 65 is opened by the winning of a small hit. It is possible to suppress a problem that the player can easily discriminate as a plurality of fluctuations.

<Control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. It should be noted that only the changes are shown with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, and the illustration and description of the same process will be omitted.

The timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 17, S104) is special to the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment. It has been changed to the symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the special symbol variation process 3 (S160), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S160). In the special symbol variation process 3 (FIGS. 101, S160) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S222 to S223 are added to the special symbol variation process (FIGS. 17, S104) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol variation is performed. The start process (FIG. 18, S208) has been changed to the special symbol variation start process 3 (FIG. 102, S240). Since each of the processes S222 to S223 is the same process as S222 to S223 of the special symbol variation process 2 (FIGS. 74 and S140) in the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 102, the special symbol variation start process 3 (FIG. 101, S160), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIGS. 101, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. 102, S240) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 3 (S240). In the special symbol variation process 3 (FIGS. 102, S240) in the seventh embodiment, each process from S340 to S342 is added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment. .. Since the other processes are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S306, if it is determined that the lottery result of S304 or S305 is not a big hit (S306: No), the process of S340 is executed. In the process of S340, it is determined whether the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the small hit determination value (S340). If it is determined to be a small hit (S340: Yes), the display mode at the time of a small hit to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S341). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S342), and the process of S311 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process (FIG. 103) of the seventh embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1003) is combined with the jackpot control process 2 (FIGS. 104, S1020) with respect to the main process (FIG. 24) of the first embodiment. The object opening / closing process (S1005) has been changed to the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (FIGS. 106 and S1040). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (S1020), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 103) in the seventh embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1020).

In the jackpot control process 2 (FIGS. 104, S1020), first, it is determined whether or not the start of the jackpot is set by the process of S215 in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIGS. 101, S160) (S1021). When it is determined that the start of the jackpot is set (S1021: Yes), an opening command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of the jackpot game is set (S1022).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of the jackpot is not set (S1021: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S1023). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1023: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1023: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round (S1024). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1024: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1025).

A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1026). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1024, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1024: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027). In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 10 game balls win the large opening 65a or 30 seconds have passed since the opening. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1028).

On the other hand, in the process of S1027, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1027: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1029). The ending effect is an effect of notifying the player of the end of the jackpot game by the display mode of the voice or the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1029: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the jackpot game is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1030).

On the other hand, in the process of S1029, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1029: No), the small hit process is executed (S1031). After that, this process ends.

The small hit process (S1031) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this small hit process.

In the small hit process (FIG. 105, S1031), first, in the process of S223 in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160), it is determined whether the start of the small hit is set (S1101). When it is determined that the start of the small hit is set (S1101: Yes), and when it is determined that the start of the small hit is set (S1101: Yes), the start of the small hit game is signaled by the voice lamp. An opening command for notifying the control device 113 is set (S1102).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the small hit is not set (S1102: No), it is determined whether the small hit game is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round (S1104). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1104: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1105). After that, the operation of the regulation solenoid 640 is set (S1106).

In this way, by setting the solenoid 600 to open and then setting the regulation solenoid to operate, the regulation solenoid operates before the large opening 65a opens, and the plunger 640a rotates the plunger link 610. By moving to the regulated position, the large opening 65a is restricted from opening. Therefore, even if the execution of the small hit is set, the rotating door 620 does not rotate, and it is possible for the player to be less aware that the small hit is won than the operation of the rotating door.

A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (the number of rounds of the small hit game) to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1107). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108). In the present embodiment, in the small hit game, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 10 game balls win a prize in the large opening 65a or 0.5 seconds have passed since the opening. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1109).

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111). The ending effect is an effect of notifying the player of the end of the small hit game by the display mode of the voice or the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the case of a small hit game, the player is not notified that the small hit is a small hit, and the characters such as the notice effect display (“first time” in the present embodiment) are displayed.

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the jackpot game is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1112). After that, this process ends. Further, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1040).

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (FIG. 106, S1040), first, it is determined whether or not the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1041). The opening setting of the large opening port 65a is set in the processing of S1025 in the large hit control process 2 (FIGS. 104 and S1020) and the processing of S1106 in the small hit processing (FIG. 105 and S1031), respectively.

When it is determined that the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1041: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening 65a is set to ON (S1042). On the other hand, it is determined whether the operation of the regulation solenoid 640 is set (S1043). The operation of the regulation solenoid 640 is set by the process of S1106 in the small hit process (FIG. 105, S1031). When it is determined that the operation of the regulation solenoid 640 is set (S1043: Yes), the regulation solenoid 640 is set to ON (S1044). After that, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1041 that the opening of the large opening 65a is not set (S1041: No), it is determined whether the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1045). The closing of the large opening 65a is set by the processing of S1028 in the large hit control process 2 (FIGS. 104 and S1020) and the processing of S1109 in the small hit processing (FIG. 105 and S1031). When it is determined that the large opening 65a is closed (S1045: Yes), the solenoid 600 is set to off (S1046). After that, the regulation solenoid 640 is set to off (S1047), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1045, when it is determined that the closing of the large opening 65a is not set (S1045: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, when the small hit is won, the regulation solenoid 640 is set to be turned on immediately after the process of turning on the solenoid 600 to be opened of the large opening port 65a. Here, since it takes 50 ms from the start of operation of the solenoid 600 to the start of rotation of the rotary door 620, the rotation of the rotary door 620 is started. Before the plunger link 610 rotates, the tip of the plunger 640a of the regulation solenoid 640 can be moved to a position where the rotation of the plunger link 610 is restricted. Therefore, at the time of a small hit, although the opening of the large opening 65a is set, the large opening 65a is not opened, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the small hit.

Here, as shown in the fifth to sixth embodiments, when the small hit is won, a plurality of fluctuations are made to appear as if they are one fluctuation, as much as possible. I want to make it difficult for the player to understand the division of each fluctuation. Here, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, although the small hit is set at the time of winning the small hit, the small hit can be changed by restricting the rotation of the rotating door 620 from rotating. It can make it difficult for the player to understand something. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit appear as if they are one fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, the small hit is configured so that the round in which the large opening 65a is opened is executed twice for 0.5 seconds. By setting a jackpot of the same operation (2 round jackpot) and setting the type of jackpot that makes the probability of winning / failing a high probability game state (probability variation game) in the subsequent game, the third symbol display By giving the same notification (displayed with the same symbol) to both the two-round big hit and the small hit with the device 81, the player cannot distinguish between the small hit and the two-round big hit. Here, further, based on the two-round jackpot, the player can make one of the plurality of fluctuations by performing an effect of showing a plurality of fluctuations including the two rounds as one fluctuation as in the case of winning the small hit. By executing the production that looks like, you can expect more big hits.

<About a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
A modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. In the seventh embodiment, a regulation solenoid 640 is provided to prevent the opening operation of the rotary door 620 of the variable winning device 65, and the rotation of the rotary door 620 is regulated. On the other hand, in the modification of the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 does not have the regulation solenoid 640, and after the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 is operated, the plunger link 610 opens the rotating door 620. It differs from the seventh embodiment in that a process of releasing the excitation of the solenoid and restricting the opening is executed by the time until the operation is started (50 ms in the present embodiment). Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the seventh embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. A small hit opening counter 203i is added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit opening counter 203i is a counter for measuring the time from the start of the opening operation of the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 to the start of the closing operation of the variable winning device 65 based on the small hit winning. is there. In the small hit opening counter 203i, a counter value corresponding to a time of 20 ms is set in the process of S1056 in the small hit process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is subtracted and updated by 1 in the process of S1074 in the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (FIGS. 109, S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

<Control processing of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 109, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the same process as that of the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

The small hit process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. The small hit process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) is a process executed in place of the process of the small hit process (FIG. 105, S1031) in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this small hit process. In the small hit process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) in the seventh embodiment, each process of S1105 and S1110 is deleted from the small hit process (FIG. 105, S1031) in the seventh embodiment, and the process of S1056 is changed. Has been added.

When the process of S1055 is executed, a counter value (5 in this embodiment) indicating 20 ms is set in the small hit opening counter 203i (S1056). After that, the process of S1057 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (S1070).

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 3 (FIG. 109, S1070), first, it is determined whether or not the opening of the large opening of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1071). When it is determined that the opening of the large opening is set (S1071: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening is set to ON (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening of the large opening is not set (S1071: No), it is determined whether the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is larger than 0 (S1073). When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is larger than 0 (S1073: Yes), the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S1074). It is determined whether the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 (S1075).

When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 (S1075: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening port is set to off (non-excited) (S1076), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 or less (S1073: No), or when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is not 0 (S1075: No), The process of S1077 is executed.

In the process of S1077, it is determined whether or not the closing of the large opening is set (S1077). When it is determined that the closing of the large opening is set (S1077: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening is set to off (S1078).

In this way, when the small hit wins the large opening of the variable winning device 65, it is set to open twice for 0.5 seconds each, but in each opening, the large opening is opened. Before the door 620 starts rotating, the solenoid 600 can be set to non-excited to forcibly restrict the opening of the large opening at the time of a small hit.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the small hit has been won by opening the opening to the player. Therefore, at the time of winning the small hit, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to know that the small hit has been won by displaying the combination of the third symbols similar to the loss on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, as shown in the fifth to sixth embodiments, in the production in which a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit are shown as if they are one variation display mode, it is difficult to understand that the small hit has been won. , More than one variation can be shown to the player as if it were one variation.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 confirms the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is the transfer data that is not the Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. Thereby, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer processing can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. are provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and MPU231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (one input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited to this. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is supplied. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are input from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 from the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. You may transfer directly to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the game machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the game machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be used as the main control device 110. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 39) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the flow of the ball being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball into the ball entry port. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is set to 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required when drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect can be described, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

In the above embodiment, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn, which is defined at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 will be transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed in the above from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image y image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. ..

In the above embodiment, the hold ball number command is mainly controlled every time the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

In addition, some or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications may be combined.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group>
It has a main control means for executing game control and a subordinate control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of a start condition. , The acquisition means for acquiring the first information, the success / failure determination means for determining the success / failure of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means for the first information acquired by the acquisition means. A hit / fail determination signal generating means for generating a hit / fail determination signal for notifying the slave control means, a determination information storage means for storing the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and before the lottery condition is satisfied. It also has a preliminary hit / fail determination signal generating means that generates a preliminary hit / fail determination signal based on the first information and notifies the slave control means, and the slave control means outputs from the main control means. Based on the winning / failing determination signal, a display means for displaying the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result, a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the prior hit / failing determination signal. In a gaming machine having a prior information storage means for storing prior information each time the start condition is satisfied, the main control means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display information storage means that stores the information, dynamic display information determination means that determines one dynamic display information based on the result of judgment from the dynamic display information storage means, and the dynamic display information determination means. It has a dynamic display information signal generation means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the above, and the slave control means is the main control means. Based on the dynamic display information signal output from the above, the dynamic display mode selection means for selecting the dynamic display mode, and the specific display mode related to the game effect based on the reception of the prior hit / fail determination signal. It has a specific display number determination means for determining the number of times to be displayed on the display means, and the specific display mode is displayed on the display means across the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game. A game machine A1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine A1, in the main control means that executes the control of the game, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the first information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the winning / failing means to determine whether the lottery game is successful or not. A hit / fail determination signal for notifying the slave control means of the pass / fail determination result of the hit / fail determination means is generated by the hit / miss determination signal generation means. The first information is stored in the determination information storage means until the lottery condition is satisfied. Before the lottery condition is satisfied, the pre-win / fail determination signal based on the first information is generated by the pre-win / fail determination signal generation means and notified to the slave control means. In the slave control means that receives the control signal from the main control means and controls the game, the identification information indicating the hit / fail judgment result is displayed on the display means based on the hit / miss judgment signal output from the main control means. .. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the prior hit / fail determination signal, prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the start condition is satisfied. In the main control means, a plurality of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information in the display means is stored in the dynamic display information storage means. One dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination from the dynamic display information storage means. The dynamic display information signal generation means generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means based on the dynamic display information signal output from the main control means. Based on the reception of the prior hit / miss determination signal, the number of times the specific display mode related to the game is displayed on the display means is determined by the specific display number determination means. The specific display mode is displayed on the display means across the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game. As a result, the awareness of the identification information is lowered by the specific display mode, and the multiple dynamic display modes can be made to appear as if they are one dynamic display mode. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a novel effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A1, the slave control means has a specific lottery means for executing a lottery as to whether or not to display the specific display mode based on receiving the advance hit / fail determination signal, and has the specific display number of times. When it is determined by the specific lottery means that the specific display mode is to be displayed, the determination means displays the specific display mode on the display means less than the number of times the start condition is satisfied stored in the prior information storage means. When the number of times is determined by the specific display number determination means, the specific display mode corresponds to each of the first information stored in the prior information storage means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is displayed once each across two consecutive dynamic display modes.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, in the slave control means, the lottery for whether or not to display the specific display mode is executed by the specific lottery means based on the receipt of the prior hit / fail determination signal. When it is determined by the specific lottery means to display the specific display mode, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display means is determined by the specific display number determination means less than the number of times the start condition stored in the prior information storage means is satisfied. Will be done. When the number of times is determined by the specific display number determination means, each specific display mode is displayed once across two consecutive dynamic display modes displayed corresponding to the first information stored in the prior information storage means. Is displayed. As a result, the dynamic display mode of the first information stored in the determination information storage means is displayed from the end to the start of the dynamic display, and a plurality of dynamic display modes are displayed in one motion. It can be shown to the player as if it is a display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel effect can be provided to the player.

In the game machine A2, the specific lottery means determines that the prior information indicated by the received prior hit / miss determination signal is a hit, or information that is determined to be a hit in the prior information stored in the prior information storage means. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, when is stored, the probability of determining that the specific display mode is to be displayed is set high.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. That is, when the prior information indicated by the received prior hit / fail determination signal is determined to be a hit, or the information to be determined to be a hit is stored in the prior information stored in the prior information storage means, the specific display mode is displayed. The probability of deciding to display is set high by the specific lottery means. As a result, when the specific display mode is displayed, it can be easily configured to be a big hit, and by displaying the specific display mode, the player can expect a big hit. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the number of times to display the specific display mode is determined by the specific display number determination means, and the dynamic display mode is started while the final specific display is displayed. If the result of determining whether or not the prior information is correct and the prior information is determined to be a hit in the prior information storage means, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information displays the dynamic display. The gaming machine A4 is characterized by having a number-of-times changing means for changing the number of times determined by the specific display number-determining means so that the specific display of the final inning is displayed during the start.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2 or A3, the following effects are played. That is, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed is determined by the specific display number determination means, and the validity / rejection of the prior information corresponding to the dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display is started while the final specific display is displayed is determined. If the result is incorrect and there is prior information that is determined to be a hit in the prior information storage means, the final specific display is performed while the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information is starting the dynamic display. The number of times determined by the specific display number determination means is changed by the number change means so as to be displayed. As a result, when the winning game is stored in the one stored in the prior information storage means, the dynamic display mode started while the last specific display mode is displayed is hit. Since the number of times of the specific display mode is changed so as to be the dynamic display mode of, the degree of expectation for the jackpot can be increased by displaying the specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A2 or the game machine A3, the main control means is a dynamic display decision information acquisition means for acquiring the dynamic display decision information for determining the dynamic display information based on the establishment of the start condition. , A pre-dynamic display that generates a pre-dynamic display signal for notifying the slave control means of the pre-dynamic display information based on the dynamic display decision information acquired by the dynamic display decision information acquisition means. The slave control means has a signal generation means, and when the slave control means receives the pre-dynamic display signal, the pre-dynamic display information indicated by the pre-dynamic display signal is used as the pre-dynamic display information. It is stored in the storage means, and the specific display number determination means determines from the prior information the result of determining whether or not the dynamic display mode starts the dynamic display while the final specific display is displayed. The game is characterized in that the number of times of the specific display mode is determined so that the final dynamic display mode becomes the specific dynamic display mode by discriminating from the hit or the pre-dynamic display information. Machine A5.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2 or A3, the following effects are played. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display decision information for determining the dynamic display information is acquired by the dynamic display decision information acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. The pre-dynamic display signal generation means generates a pre-dynamic display signal for notifying the slave control means of the pre-dynamic display information based on the dynamic display decision information acquired by the dynamic display decision information acquisition means. Will be done. In the slave control means, when the pre-dynamic display signal is received, the pre-dynamic display information indicated by the pre-dynamic display signal is stored in the pre-information storage means. The dynamic display is started while the last specific display is displayed. The result of the judgment of whether or not the dynamic display mode is correct is determined from the prior information and hit or determined from the prior dynamic display information and the final dynamic display. The number of times of the specific display mode is determined by the specific notice number determination means so that the mode becomes the specific dynamic display mode. As a result, when the specific display mode is displayed, the final dynamic display mode in which the specific display mode is displayed becomes a big hit or a specific dynamic display mode, so that the player is given an effect different from the normal time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to execute the final dynamic display mode when the specific display mode is displayed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the specific display mode is displayed so as to hide the identification information in an area where the identification information is displayed.

According to any of the game machines A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, a specific display mode is displayed in the area where the identification information is displayed so as to hide the identification information. It becomes difficult for the player to understand that the result of the above is displayed, and there is an effect that the continuous lottery game can be shown to the player as if it is one lottery game.

The game machine A7 is characterized in that any one of the game machines A1 to A6 has a delay display means for delaying the dynamic display of the identification information after the specific display mode is displayed.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the dynamic display of the identification information is delayed by the delay display means after the specific display mode is displayed, so that the specific display mode is identified. There is an effect that the display control does not overlap with the information and the control load can be reduced.

In the game machine A6, the display control means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means at a low speed for a certain period of time, and then dynamically displays the identification information at a high speed. Among the continuous lottery games, the game machine A8 is characterized in that it is displayed for a longer period than the fixed period of the subsequent lottery games.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A6, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means at low speed for a certain period of time, and then dynamically displayed by the display control means at high speed. Of the consecutive lottery games, the subsequent lottery games are displayed longer than a certain period of time, so that the effect is that the two consecutive lottery games can be shown to the player as if they were one more lottery game. is there.

<Characteristic B group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the game, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means, and the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information. A display control means to be displayed, a storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored, and a dynamic display based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the storage means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, the plurality of dynamic display modes have a fixed-term dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to a game is preset. Is included, and when the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period. , A specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode on the display means when it is determined that the specific display mode has been established, and a switching means for switching the dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to an alternative dynamic display mode. A game machine B1 characterized by having.

According to the game machine B1, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination from the storage means. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a fixed-term dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to a game is set in advance. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is performed. The specific display mode is displayed on the means on the front side of the identification information by the specific display control means. The dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed is switched to the alternative dynamic display mode by the switching means. As a result, it is possible to display different effects to the player depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the notice display period. Therefore, when the specific display mode is displayed, the subsequent dynamic display mode is also switched, so that the player can produce a fresh effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 has an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the establishment of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. ..

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated. There is an effect that the player can be more actively participated in the game.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the specific display mode is a game machine B3 that notifies the player of the number of times displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, in the specific display mode, the number of times displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period is notified to the player as the specific display mode. There is an effect that the number of times of the specific display mode can be easily identified by the player and the game can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, at least the number of times of the display period or a plurality of the plurality of fixed-term dynamic display modes having different periods are stored in the storage means, and the dynamic display mode determining means can be used. When the fixed-term dynamic display mode is determined, the display period is set based on the first display period set in the determined fixed-term dynamic display mode, and the predetermined display period is used. The gaming machine B4 is characterized by having a display period setting means for setting the next valid period when the condition of the above is satisfied.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the following effect is played. That is, at least the number of display periods or a plurality of fixed-term dynamic display modes having different periods are stored in the storage means. When one fixed-term dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the display period is set based on the first display period set in the determined fixed-term dynamic display mode. , When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the display period, the next valid period is set by the display period setting means. As a result, even if a plurality of display periods are set, the initial display period may be set at the start of dynamic display, and the control load at the start of dynamic display can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the concentration of the control load.

<Characteristic C group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the game, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means, and the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information. A display control means to be used, a storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and a dynamic display based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the storage means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining an aspect, the plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set so as to be able to display a specific display mode related to a game. It is included, and when the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode on the display means, and the switching means for switching the dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to the alternative dynamic display mode. A game machine C1 characterized by being.

According to the game machine C1, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed on the display means. The identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination from the storage means. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode that is set so that a specific display mode related to the game can be displayed. When the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific display mode is determined. Is displayed on the display means by the specific display control means. The dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed is switched to the alternative dynamic display mode by the switching means. As a result, even if the same special dynamic display mode is determined, the display timing of the specific display changes depending on the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the timing of switching to the alternative dynamic display mode is also variable, it is possible to make the player appear as if the dynamic display mode is different each time. Therefore, there is an effect that various game effects can be shown to the player.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 has an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the establishment of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. ..

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated. There is an effect that the player can be more actively participated in the game.

In the game machine C1 or C2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining time is determined by the remaining time determining means for determining the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode and the remaining time determining means, and the remaining time is equal to or less than the predetermined time. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by having an invalidating means for invalidating the establishment of the predetermined condition when it is determined to be.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1 or C2, the following effects are played. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode is determined by the remaining time determining means. When the remaining time determination means determines that the remaining time is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the establishment of the predetermined condition is invalidated by the invalid means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the specific display is displayed during the period in which the hit / miss judgment result is confirmed and notified in the dynamic display mode, and the player cannot know the hit / miss judgment result.

<Feature D group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the game, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the winning / failing determination means, and the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information. A display control means to be used, a storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and a dynamic display based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the storage means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining an aspect, the plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set so as to be able to display a specific display mode related to a game. It is included that the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that determines that the player has operated the operation means, and the operation determination means that the operation determination means has been determined to have been operated. When the counting means for counting the number of times and the special dynamic display mode are dynamically displayed, it is determined that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means, and the counting means is based on the count value of the counting means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized by having a specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode when the display permission condition to be determined is satisfied.

According to the game machine D1, the winning / failing determination of the game is executed by the winning / failing determination means based on the establishment of the starting condition. Identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed on the display means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored in the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination from the storage means. A plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode in which a specific display mode related to a game can be displayed up to a predetermined number of times. It is determined by the operation determining means that the player has operated the operating means that can be operated by the player. The number of times is counted by the counting means based on the fact that the operation determining means determines that the operating means has been operated. When the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, and when the count value of the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the specific display mode is the specific display control means. Is displayed on the display means. As a result, even if the operating means is operated, the specific display mode is not displayed unless the operation is performed a predetermined number of times or more, and the effect can be changed depending on the playing method and frequency of the player. Therefore, even if the dynamic display mode is the same, it can be made to look like a different dynamic display mode depending on the player, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The game machine D1 is characterized in that the display permission condition is determined based on the count value of the counting means and the set number of times of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode. Game machine D2 to play.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the display permission condition is determined based on the count value of the counting means and the set number of times of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode. , There is an effect that the display permission condition of the specific display mode can be changed by the special dynamic display mode.

The game machine D1 or D2 is characterized in that the display permission condition is set for each number of times the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode is displayed.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the display permission condition is set for each number of times the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode is displayed. There is an effect that a specific display mode can be displayed under different conditions depending on the number of times that is displayed.

<Feature E group>
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, at least the hit / fail determination means for determining whether the first hit is advantageous to the player and the second hit which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the pass / fail determination means A display means for displaying identification information indicating a hit / fail determination result, a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. It has a storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display mode groups are stored, and a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the hit / fail determination result from the storage means. In a gaming machine in which a lottery game is executed based on a lottery result by a determination means, the plurality of dynamic display mode groups have a specific dynamic display mode having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. A group is included, and based on the determination of the first hit by the winning / failing determination means, the dynamic display mode of the lottery game continuously executed after the lottery game is defined as the specific dynamic display mode group. The continuous dynamic display mode has a transition number setting means for setting the number of lottery games to be determined by the above, and the continuous dynamic display mode is continuous with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. A game machine E1 characterized in that it is configured by an aspect.

According to the game machine E1, based on the establishment of the starting condition, at least the first hit that is advantageous to the player and the second hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are determined by the hit / fail determination means. Will be done. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. The identification information is displayed and controlled by the display control means on the display means. A plurality of dynamic display mode groups having a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored by the storage means. One dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the result of the hit / fail determination from the storage means. Then, the lottery game is executed based on the determination result of the lottery game. The plurality of dynamic display mode groups include a specific dynamic display mode group having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. Based on the winning / failing determination means determining the first hit, the number of times of the lottery game in which the dynamic display mode of the lottery game continuously executed after the lottery game is determined from the specific dynamic display mode group is the number of transitions. It is set by the setting means. The continuous dynamic display mode is composed of a continuous display mode and a dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. As a result, by winning the first prize, it is possible to make a plurality of lottery games appear as if they are one lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine E1, a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to the game is preset in the continuous dynamic display mode, and the continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means is provided with the specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode. A game machine E2 characterized by being there.

According to the game machine E2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the game machine E1. That is, the display period for displaying the specific display mode related to the game is set in advance in the continuous dynamic display mode. When the continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means is used. The specific display mode is displayed by the specific display control means. Therefore, when the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific display mode is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that an effect different from the normal time can be given to the player.

In the game machine E1 or the game machine E2, the continuous dynamic display mode group includes a first continuous dynamic display mode configured by a dynamic display mode from the start of the dynamic display mode to the dynamic display mode, and a dynamic display mode. A second interlocking dynamic display mode in which the displayed state is continued, and a third continuous dynamic display mode composed of a dynamic display mode from the dynamically displayed state to the stop display of the dynamic display. The first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous mode from the continuous dynamic display mode group, at least corresponding to the number of times set by the transition set number of times setting means. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that any one of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.

According to the game machine E3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or the game machine E2. That is, among the continuous dynamic display modes, the first continuous dynamic display mode is composed of dynamic display modes from the start of the dynamic display mode to the middle of the dynamic display mode. In the second continuous dynamic display mode, the dynamically displayed state is continued. The third continuous dynamic display mode is composed of a dynamic display mode from the dynamic display state to the stop display of the dynamic display. From the continuous dynamic display mode group, the first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous dynamic display mode correspond to the number of times set by the transition set number of times setting means. Either is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. As a result, it is possible to easily set the display mode to be continuous with the display mode of the previous lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the dynamic display mode of the multiple lottery games is the dynamic display mode of the one lottery game. Therefore, even when the lottery game of the winning / failing determination result is executed a plurality of times, it can be shown to the player as if the losing lottery game was performed once, and the player is disappointed with the game. It has the effect of suppressing the number of times.

Based on the determination by the second hit and the hit / fail determination means before the lottery game of the number of times set by the transition number setting means is executed in any of the game machines E1 to E3. The gaming machine E4 having a reset means for resetting the number of times set by the transition number setting means.

According to the game machine E4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the game machines E1 to E3. That is, before the lottery game of the number of times set by the transition number setting means is executed, the number of times set by the transition number setting means is set by the reset means based on the determination of the second hit and the hit / fail determination means. It will be reset. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the continuous dynamic display mode is continuously executed even after the jackpot game is started before the lottery game of the number of times set by the transition number setting means is performed. Therefore, the number of times until the lottery game that becomes a big hit can be easily changed, and there is an effect that a plurality of fluctuations can be shown to the player as if it was one fluctuation that becomes a big hit.

<Feature F>
It has a main control means for executing game control and a subordinate control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of a start condition. The first hit and the first hit in which the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player is given based on the establishment of the lottery condition from the acquisition means for acquiring the first information and the first information acquired by the acquisition means. The hit / fail determination means for at least determining whether or not the second hit to which the second privilege game is given, which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the result of the hit / fail determination of the hit / fail determination means are assigned to the secondary control means. A hit / fail judgment information generating means that generates hit / fail judgment information for identifiable notification, a judgment information storage means that stores the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a lottery condition before the lottery condition is satisfied. Different operations composed of a prior information generating means that generates prior information based on the first information and notifies the slave control means, and a dynamic display information that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. A dynamic display information storage means that stores a plurality of target display information groups, and one of the plurality of dynamic display information groups from the dynamic display information storage means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. A dynamic display information determining means for determining a display information group and determining one of the dynamic display information according to the hit / fail determination result and the first information from the determined dynamic display information group, and its operation. It has a dynamic display notification information generating means for generating dynamic display notification information for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the target display information determining means, and has the slave control. The means include a display means for displaying identification information indicating the hit / miss determination result based on the hit / miss determination information output from the main control means, and a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Based on the dynamic display mode storage means that stores the dynamic display modes of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control means and the dynamic display notification information output from the main control means. Based on the dynamic display mode selection means for selecting the dynamic display mode of the identification information from the dynamic display mode storage means and the prior information received from the main control means, the prior information is provided each time the start condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a pre-information storage means for storing and executing a lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the plurality of dynamic display information groups are subjected to the first hit / fail determination means. The dynamic The specific dynamic display information group composed of the specific dynamic display information determined by the display information determining means is included, and the dynamic display mode storage means of the slave control means is the specific dynamic. A specific dynamic display mode that corresponds to the display information and is capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is stored, and the main control means is said by the hit / fail determination means. Based on the determination of the first hit, the number of transitions for setting the number of lottery games for determining the dynamic display mode of the lottery games continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group. The sub-control means has a setting means, and the sub-control means determines the number of times set by the transition number setting means of the main control means based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Each of the above-mentioned specific dynamic display information groups is determined according to the transition number determination means for determining and the advance information stored in the advance information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the transition number determination means. The specific dynamic display information is discriminated before the lottery condition is satisfied, and the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection means is discriminated according to the discriminated specific dynamic display information in advance. Of the number of times determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the transition number determination means, the remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game completes the dynamic display is determined. A specific display number determination for determining an upper limit number of times for displaying the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected corresponding to the number of times of the lottery game determined by the time determination means and the transition number determination means. The means, the alternative dynamic display mode storage means in which the alternative dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information in place of the specific dynamic display mode is stored, and the upper limit number of times determined by the specific display number determination means. When the specific display mode is displayed up to, the alternative dynamic display mode selection means for selecting the alternative dynamic display mode based on the remaining time determined by the remaining time discriminating means is a predetermined time or more. A game machine F1 characterized by having and.

According to the game machine F1, in the main control means in which the control of the game is executed, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition from the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the first prize game that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The second hit to which the privilege game is given is at least determined by the winning / failing determination means. Based on the control signal from the main control means, the pass / fail determination information for notifying the subordinate control means on which the control of the game is executed so that the hit type can be identified is obtained by the pass / fail determination information generation means. Will be generated. The first information is stored by the determination information storage means until the lottery condition is satisfied. Before the lottery condition is satisfied, advance information based on the first information is generated by the advance information generating means and notified to the slave control means. A plurality of different dynamic display information groups composed of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means are stored by the dynamic display information storage means. Based on the fact that the lottery condition is satisfied, one dynamic display information group is determined from the plurality of dynamic display information groups by the dynamic display information storage means, and the result is determined from the determined dynamic display information group. According to the determination result and the first information, one of the dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means. Dynamic display notification information for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means is generated by the dynamic display notification information generating means. On the other hand, in the slave control means, the identification information indicating the hit / miss determination result is displayed by the display means based on the hit / miss determination information output from the main control means. The identification information is displayed and controlled by the display control means on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control means is stored by the dynamic display mode storage means. Based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means from the dynamic display mode storage means. Based on the prior information received from the main control means, the prior information is stored by the prior information storage means each time the start condition is satisfied. A plurality of specific dynamic display information groups composed of specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determination means when it is determined that the first hit is won by the win / fail determination means Included in the group. The specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the specific dynamic display information and capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is stored by the dynamic display mode storage means of the subordinate control means. In the main control means, a lottery that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means. The number of games is set by the transition number setting means. In the slave control means, the number of times set by the shift number setting means of the main control means is determined by the shift count determination means based on the determination of the first hit by the hit / fail determination means of the main control means. Each specific dynamic display information determined from the specific dynamic display information group is determined before the lottery condition is satisfied according to the prior information stored in the prior information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the transition number determination means. Then, the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection means according to the discriminated specific dynamic display information is discriminated by the pre-specific dynamic display mode discriminating means. Of the number of times determined by the transition number determination means, the remaining time until the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed in the dynamic display is determined by the remaining time determination means. The maximum number of times to display the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected corresponding to the number of lottery games determined by the shift number determination means is determined by the specific display number determination means. An alternative dynamic display mode that dynamically displays the identification information instead of the specific dynamic display mode is stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage means. When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times determined by the specific display number determination means, the alternative dynamic display mode is substituted based on the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination means being a predetermined time or more. It is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means. Thereby, after the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times, the dynamic display mode can be changed to the display mode according to the remaining time. Therefore, it is possible to give the player different dynamic display modes depending on the timing of the specific display up to the maximum number of times, and it is possible to diversify the dynamic display modes given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that the transfer number setting means is configured to be able to set a number of shifts equal to or greater than the number of first information stored in the determination information storage means.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the number of transfers equal to or greater than the number of the first information stored in the determination information storage means can be set by the transfer number setting means, so that the number is larger. It is possible to have the player perform a lottery game in a specific dynamic display mode, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine F1 or the game machine F2, the alternative dynamic display mode storage means stores a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes having different dynamic display times, and the alternative dynamic display mode selection means is the plurality of alternative dynamic display mode selection means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, among the alternative dynamic display modes, the alternative dynamic display mode configured by the dynamic display time that most closely resembles the remaining time is selected.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or the game machine F2, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes having different dynamic display times are stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage means. Among the plurality of alternative dynamic display modes, the alternative dynamic display mode composed of the dynamic display time that most closely resembles the remaining time is selected by the alternative dynamic display mode selection means. Therefore, since the dynamic display mode is displayed according to the remaining time, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In any of the game machines F1 to the game machine F3, the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification symbols, and in the alternative dynamic display mode, the remaining one identification symbol of the identification information indicating the second hit is used. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it includes a device that displays a reach display mode in which only a dynamic display is performed.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines F1 to the game machine F3, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification symbols. Among the identification information indicating the second hit, the alternative dynamic display mode includes the one that displays the reach display mode in which only the remaining one identification symbol is dynamically displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can expect a second hit by displaying the alternative dynamic display mode.

In the game machine F4, the alternative dynamic display mode is to start the dynamic display of the identification information from the state of the reach display mode.

<Feature G>
A variable winning device that can be changed between a first state in which the game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state, and the start of the lottery game based on the winning of the game medium. The first hit and the first hit in which the start winning device that satisfies the condition and the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device to the first state based on the establishment of the starting condition are given. A hit / fail determination means for at least determining whether or not a second hit to which a second privilege game is given, which is more advantageous to the player than the first hit, and a display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination of the hit / fail determination means. And, based on the display of the identification information indicating that it is the first hit or the second hit, the variable processing for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state is executed. After the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means and the variable control executing means in the case of the first hit, before the variable winning device changes from the second state to the first state. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a regulatory means for restricting the variable winning device from being variable to the first state.

According to the game machine G1, the variable winning device is variable between the first state in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. The start condition of the lottery game is established based on the game medium winning the variable winning device. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given. The second hit to which the privilege game is given is at least determined by the winning / failing determination means. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means. Based on the display of the identification information indicating that the first hit or the second hit, the variable processing for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state is executed by the variable control executing means. In the case of the first hit, the variable winning device is variable to the first state after the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means and before the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state. Is regulated by regulatory means. As a result, in the case of the first hit, the variable winning device is restricted from being variable to the first state, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the first privilege game is more advantageous than the second privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have higher expectations for the second privilege game and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine G1, the variable winning device has a winning opening for the game medium to win, a regulated position for restricting the winning opening for the gaming medium in the second state, and a restricted position for restricting the winning of the gaming medium in the first state. A movable piece that can be moved to a guiding position that guides the game medium to the winning opening, and a movable means that moves the movable piece after a predetermined time of operation after the variable processing by the variable control executing means is executed. The gaming machine G2, wherein the regulating means executes a process of regulating within the predetermined time.

According to the game machine G2, in the second state, the regulation position that regulates the winning of the game medium to the winning opening of the variable winning device in which the game medium wins, and in the first state, the game medium is guided to the winning opening. A movable piece of the movable winning device is provided at the guiding position to be moved. Further, the movable piece is moved by the movable means after a predetermined time operation after the variable processing by the variable control executing means is executed. The process of regulation within a predetermined time is executed by the regulatory means. Therefore, in the first hit, the movement of the movable piece can be regulated before the variable winning device is in the first state, so that the first privilege game is more reliably advantageous to the player than the second privilege game. It has the effect of preventing the problem of becoming.

In the game machine G1, the variable winning device has a winning opening for the game medium to win, a regulated position for restricting the winning opening for the gaming medium in the second state, and a restricted position for restricting the winning of the gaming medium in the first state. From the movable piece movable to the guiding position for guiding the game medium to the winning opening, the movable means for moving the movable piece based on the execution of the variable processing by the variable control executing means, and the regulating means. The gaming machine G3 is characterized by having a regulating member movable means for moving the regulating member at a position for restricting the movement of the movable piece based on the execution of the regulating process of the above.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, the following effects are played. That is, in the variable winning device, in the second state, the regulation position that regulates the winning of the game medium to the winning opening where the game medium wins, and in the first state, the guiding position that guides the game medium to the winning opening. The movable piece is movable. The movable piece is moved by the movable means based on the execution of the variable processing by the variable control executing means. Based on the execution of the regulating process from the regulating means, the regulating member is moved by the regulating member moving means to a position where the movement of the movable piece is restricted. As a result, the movement of the movable piece can be regulated by the regulating member before the variable winning device is in the first state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent a problem that the first privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The game machine Z2, wherein each of the game machines is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery has been performed along with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, and the big winning opening is opened when the lottery result is a big hit or when it is judged as a small hit even if it is out of the lottery. .. The small hit is configured so that the game ball is less likely to win than the big hit.
In such a pachinko machine, when opening the big winning opening based on a small hit, the opening time is shorter than that at the time of the big hit, and the number of times of opening is reduced, so that the number of game balls given by the small hit is larger than that of the big hit. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-254343).
In this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that a large amount of game media accidentally wins a prize at a hit with a small privilege, and the value of the hit with a large privilege becomes inconspicuous.
This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, etc., so that the player can expect a hit with a larger privilege, and the player gets tired of the game early. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can prevent the problem.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a variable winning device that can change between a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. The start winning device that satisfies the starting condition of the lottery game based on the winning of the game medium, and the variable winning device that is changed to the first state based on the establishment of the starting condition to the player. A winning / failing determination means for at least determining whether or not the first hit to which the first privileged game that is advantageous is given and the second hit to which the second privileged game that is more advantageous to the player than the first hit is given, and the winning / failing determination means thereof. Based on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail determination of the hit / fail determination means and the identification information indicating that the first hit or the second hit is displayed, the variable winning device is described. After the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means for executing the variable processing for changing from the second state to the first state and the variable control executing means in the case of the first hit, the variable winning prize. It has a regulating means for restricting the variable winning device from changing to the first state before the device changes from the second state to the first state.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1. In the variable winning device, the game medium wins a prize, and in the second state, the game medium wins a prize in the winning opening. After the movable piece that can be moved to the regulated position that regulates the movement and the guide position that guides the game medium to the winning opening in the first state, and the variable process by the variable control executing means are executed. It has a movable means for moving the movable piece after operation for a predetermined time, and the regulating means executes a process of regulating within the predetermined time.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1. In the variable winning device, the game medium wins a prize, and in the second state, the game medium wins a prize in the winning opening. Based on the regulated position that regulates the movement, the movable piece that can be moved to the guide position that guides the game medium to the winning opening in the first state, and the execution of the variable process by the variable control executing means. It has a movable means for moving the movable piece and a regulating member movable means for moving the regulating member at a position for restricting the movement of the movable piece based on the execution of the regulating process from the regulating means. is there.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the variable winning device is variable between the first state in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. The start condition of the lottery game is established based on the game medium winning the variable winning device. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given. The second hit to which the privilege game is given is at least determined by the winning / failing determination means. The identification information indicating the result of the hit / miss determination of the hit / miss determination means is displayed by the display means.
Based on the display of the identification information indicating that the first hit or the second hit, the variable processing for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state is executed by the variable control executing means. In the case of the first hit, the variable winning device is variable to the first state after the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means and before the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state. Is regulated by regulatory means.
As a result, in the case of the first hit, the variable winning device is restricted from being variable to the first state, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the first privilege game is more advantageous than the second privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have higher expectations for the second privilege game and can prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, in the second state, the regulation position that regulates the winning of the game medium to the winning opening of the variable winning device in which the game medium wins, and the guiding position that guides the game medium to the winning opening in the first state. A movable piece of a movable winning device is provided. Further, the movable piece is moved by the movable means after a predetermined time operation after the variable processing by the variable control executing means is executed. The process of regulation within a predetermined time is executed by the regulatory means. Therefore, in the first hit, the movement of the movable piece can be regulated before the variable winning device is in the first state, so that the first privilege game is more reliably advantageous to the player than the second privilege game. It has the effect of preventing the problem of becoming.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, in the variable winning device, in the second state, the regulation position that regulates the winning of the game medium to the winning opening where the game medium wins, and in the first state, the guiding position that guides the game medium to the winning opening. The movable piece is movable. The movable piece is moved by the movable means based on the execution of the variable processing by the variable control executing means. Based on the execution of the regulating process from the regulating means, the regulating member is moved by the regulating member moving means to a position where the movement of the movable piece is restricted.
As a result, the movement of the movable piece can be regulated by the regulating member before the variable winning device is in the first state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent a problem that the first privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
81 Third symbol display device (display means )
114 Display control device (part of display control means)
202 ROM (dynamic display mode storage means)
203a Special symbol holding ball storage area (judgment information storage means)
223a Advance information storage means
S306 determination means
S308, S310 Dynamic display mode determining means
S406 acquisition means
S1607 Specific discrimination means
S1611 Specific impression number determination means

Claims (2)

An acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the acquisition conditions,
A determination information storage means for storing the first information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination information storage means.
A determination means for determining the first information stored in the determination information storage means, and
A pre-determination means capable of executing a pre-determination based on the first information stored in the determination information storage means before the determination is made by the determination means.
A prior information storage means that stores prior information indicating a preliminary determination result by the prior determination means each time the acquisition condition is satisfied, and
A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
A display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
Dynamic display mode storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes are stored as dynamic display modes of the determination game in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display means.
In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the determination result from the dynamic display mode storage means.
A specific display number determination means capable of determining the number of times a specific display mode is displayed on the display means based on the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.
It has a specific determination means for executing determination as to whether or not to display the specific display mode based on the prior information.
The specific display number determination means is less than the number of times that the acquisition condition corresponding to the prior information stored in the prior information storage means is satisfied when the specific display mode is determined to be displayed by the specific determination means. Determines the number of times to display the specific display mode on the display means.
The specific display mode is
It is configured so that the number of times it is displayed consecutively can be identified.
When the number of times is determined by the specific display number determination means, the two consecutive dynamic display modes displayed corresponding to the first information stored in the determination information storage means are straddled. all SANYO that once displayed, respectively,
When the identification information that has been displayed up to that point is hidden by displaying the specific display mode, the game machine has an alternative mode in which the identification information is associated with a position that can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to display the information in a form smaller than the displayed identification information. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is arranged at a position visible to the player.

Images